w203 PDF

C 230 Kompressor Sport
C 240
C 240 4MATIC
C 320
C 320 4MATIC
C 320 Sport
C 32 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you

on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Please read this manual carefully, then

return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company

name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Please follow the recommendations

contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
Please pay attention to the warnings

and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles

of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operators Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18
At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit................................................. 20
Instrument cluster ................................ 22
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24
Center console ..................................... 25
Upper part ...................................... 25
Lower part ...................................... 26
Overhead control panel ........................ 27
Door control panel................................ 28
Getting started ...................................

Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belt ...................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals and high beam ............
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off engine...........................
29
30
30
32
32
36
38
40
40
43
46
47
47
49
50
50
51
52
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................

Occupant safety...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear door window
operation........................................
Panic alarm* ........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP.................................................
Four wheel electronic traction
system (4MATIC) with the ESP .......
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system* ................
Tow-away alarm* ...........................
53
54
55
60
63
70
71
71
71
72
72
73
74
77
78
78
78
79
Controls in detail ............................... 81

Locking and unlocking ......................... 82
SmartKey ....................................... 82
Opening the doors from
the inside ....................................... 85
Opening the trunk .......................... 86
Closing the trunk............................ 87
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 88
Separately locking the trunk .......... 89
Separately unlocking the trunk ...... 90
Automatic central locking .............. 90
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ....................................... 91
Seats ................................................... 92
Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 92
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints............................... 93
Rear seat head restraints ............... 94
Multicontour seat*......................... 97
Heated seats* ................................ 98
Memory function* ............................... 99
Storing positions into memory ..... 100
Recalling positions from memory . 100
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 101
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Trunk lamp...................................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature display........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAVI* menu.................................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
102
102
105
106
107
108
108
109
109
110
111
111
111
113
113
114
116
118
118
121
122
123
136
138
Contents
Manual transmission .........................

Shifting into reverse.....................
Automatic transmission*...................
One-touch gearshifting.................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Program mode selector switch.....
Accelerator position.....................
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
Good visibility ....................................
Windshield wipers ........................
Headlamp cleaning system* ........
Rear view mirrors.........................
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window sunshade* ..............
Rear window defroster .................
Climate control ..................................
Setting the temperature...............
Adjusting air distribution and
volume .........................................
Defrosting ....................................
Air recirculation mode..................
Deactivating the climate control
system .........................................
Air conditioning............................
141
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
147
148
148
148
149
151
152
153
154
156
157
158
158
159
160
Ventilated storage compartment .. 160

Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 161
Automatic climate control* ................ 162
Setting the temperature................ 165
Adjusting air distribution............... 166
Adjusting air volume ..................... 166
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 167
Defrosting ..................................... 167
Air recirculation mode .................. 167
Charcoal filter ............................... 169
Air conditioning............................. 170
Residual heat and ventilation........ 171
adjustable air vents....................... 172
Audio system...................................... 173
Audio and telephone, operation.... 173
Operating safety ........................... 173
Operating and display elements.... 174
Button and soft key operation....... 176
Operation...................................... 176
Radio operation ............................ 179
Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only)... 182
Cassette operation ....................... 186
CD changer* operation................. 189
Telephone* operation ................... 193
Power windows .................................. 200

Opening and closing
the windows ................................. 200
Synchronizing power windows...... 202
Sliding/pop-up roof*.......................... 203
Opening and closing
the sliding/pop-up roof ................ 203
Synchronizing
the sliding/pop-up roof ................ 205
Driving systems.................................. 206
Cruise control ............................... 206
Loading .............................................. 209
Roof rack* .................................... 209
Ski sack* ...................................... 209
Split rear bench seat* .................. 212
Loading instructions ..................... 214
Useful features................................... 216
Interior storage spaces................. 216
Ashtrays........................................ 220
Cigarette lighter............................ 221
Telephone* ................................... 222
Tele Aid*....................................... 223
Garage door opener...................... 231
Contents
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly save fuel .............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes ..........................................
Driving off.....................................
Parking .........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning ................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water .............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitters..................................
Catalytic converter .......................
Emission control...........................
Coolant temperature ....................
237
238
239
239
239
239
239
240
241
241
242
242
243
243
244
245
246
246
246
247
247
248
At the gas station ..............................

Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip.....................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Coolant level ................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tire.....................................
Direction of rotation.....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels ...........................
249
249
251
252
252
253
256
257
258
259
260
260
261
261
261
262
Winter driving ....................................

Winter tires ..................................
Block heater (Canada only) ..........
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the service indicator ......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator....
Resetting the service indicator ....
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
263
263
264
264
265
265
265
266
266
267
267
Contents
Practical hints ................................

What to do if ..................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Lamp in center console................
Messages in the display ...............
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit...................................
Vehicle tool kit .............................
Minispare wheel...........................
Unlocking/locking in an emergency..
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Changing batteries in
the SmartKey ...............................
Fuel filler flap ...............................
Manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever ..
Opening/closing in an emergency.....
Sliding/pop-up roof* ...................
273
274
274
279
280
300
300
300
302
305
305
306
307
308
308
309
309
Replacing bulbs .................................. 310

Bulbs............................................. 310
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 312
Side marker lamp bulb.................. 314
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 315
Replacing wiper blades....................... 316
Removing wiper blades ................. 316
Installing wiper blades .................. 316
Flat tire............................................... 317
Preparing the vehicle .................... 317
Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 317
Battery................................................ 323
Disconnecting the battery............. 324
Removing the battery.................... 324
Charging and reinstalling
the battery .................................... 324
Reconnecting the battery.............. 325
Jump starting...................................... 326

Towing the vehicle.............................. 328
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 331
Fuses.................................................. 332
Fuse box in
passenger compartment............... 332
Fuse box in engine compartment . 333
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk ............ 334
Contents
Technical data..................................
Spare parts service ............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet......................
Identification labels............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
C 230 Kompressor Sport..............
C 240/C 320 (all models) ............
C 32 AMG.....................................
Engine................................................
Rims and Tires ...................................
Same size tires .............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Minispare wheel ...........................
Electrical system................................
Main dimensions................................
Weights..............................................
335
336
337
337
338
339
339
339
339
340
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........

Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Flexible Fuel Vehicles...................
Coolants.......................................
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system .........................
Consumer information .......................
Uniform tire quality grading .........
349
349
352
352
352
352
353
353
354
354
356
358
359
359
Technical terms............................... 361
Index................................................. 367
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for

other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as

conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will
be performed.
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operators Manual
This Operators Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our

product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operators Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
New Car Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in

this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
State Warranty Enforcement Laws

(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that are

not shown or described in this Operators
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operators Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information

Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operators Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is

likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason

of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operators Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
If you change your address, be sure to

send in the Change of Address Notice
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program Brochure in your glove box.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all

literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Always have the Service Booklet with you

when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to

send in the Notice of Purchase of Used
Car found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
service facilities or replacement parts

may not be readily available,
In the USA:
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.

European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operators Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
drivers seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information

about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the Getting
started section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Here you will find all the information you

need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
this Operators Manual
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be

provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operators Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified

with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
This symbol points to instructions for

you to follow.
A number of these symbols appearing

in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
This continuation symbol marks

an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical

terms, this symbol is used to
indicate cross-references to
term definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in

the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to

look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!
Work improperly carried out on electronic

components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicles electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody

or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair
facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the Technical data section in this

manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety

standards
Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your

vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Combination switch
6 Overhead control panel
Turn signals
47
Windshield wipers
High beam
2 Cruise control lever

3 Instrument cluster
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
5 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions
Item
Page
27
216
47
7 Glove box lid release, glove

box lock
47
8 Glove box
216
Item
e Hood lock release
f Parking brake pedal
Page
252
45, 50
g Trunk lid release switch
86
h Door control panel
28
206
9 Center console
25
j Parking brake release
45
22,
109
a Starter switch
31
k Exterior lamp switch
102
24,
114
c Steering wheel adjustment

handle (manual)
37
d Steering wheel adjustment

stalk (electrical)*
37
b Horn
l Exterior rear view mirror

adjustment
m Headlamp washer switch*
38
148
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 Left turn signal indicator
lamp
Page
Item
47
2 Speedometer
3 Right turn signal indicator
lamp
47
4 Fuel gauge with:

Fuel reserve warning lamp
278
5 < Seat belt non-usage

warning lamp
60,
278
Page
Gear selector lever

position
44,
145
Program mode
146
Outside temperature
indicator
111
Digital clock
113
7 ? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
276
74,
277
47,
106
1 Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
54,
278
v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp
6 Multifunction display
with:
113
A High beam headlamp indicator
Trip odometer
111
E Indicator lamp
without function1
Main odometer
113
DTR
1
Indicator lamp
without function1
Item
Page
8 - Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
indicator lamp
72,
274
; Brake warning
lamp, USA only
45,
50,
275
3 Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
45,
50,
275
9 Tachometer
111
a Reset button for:
Resetting trip
odometer
111
Resetting individual
settings
124
Instrument cluster
illumination
109
The indicator lamp illuminates with SmartKey in

starter switch position 2. It should go out when the
engine is running.
23
At a glance
Item
1 Multifunction display in
speedometer
113
Operating control
system
113
Item
4 Menu systems: Press
button
for next system
for previous system
2 Selecting the submenu or

setting the volume
5 Moving within a menu:

Press button
down/to decrease
j for next display
up/to increase
3 Telephone*: Press button
to take a call
to end a call
24
Page
k for previous display
Page
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Item
1 Seat heater*, drivers side
2 Rear window sunshade
switch
3 ESP control switch
4 Hazard warning flasher
switch switching on/off
Page
98
152
74
106
5 Central locking switch
91
6 Rear seat head restraints

switch
95
7 Anti-theft alarm system

indicator lamp
78
Tow-away alarm switch
79
Item
8 Seat heater*, passenger
side
Page
98
9 PASS. AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp
66,
279
a Audio system,
or
173
COMAND* (see separate

operating instructions)
b Climate control
154
Automatic climate control*
162
Rear window defroster
153
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Ashtray
220
2 Gear selector lever for

automatic transmission*
44,
145
Gearshift lever for manual

transmission
3 Storage compartment
26
Page
43,
141
218
Cup holder
217
Cigarette lighter
221
4 Armrest
219
5 Program mode selector for

automatic transmission
146
At a glance
Item
Page
1 Rear interior lighting

on/off
108
2 Sliding/pop-up roof*
203
3 Right reading lamp on/off
108
4 Interior lighting control
107
5 Hands-free microphone for

Tele Aid* (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system*
(see separate operating
instructions)
138,
193,
223
6 Interior rear view mirror
38,
149
7 Garage door opener
231
8 Left reading lamp on/off
108
9 Tele Aid* (emergency call

system) button
223
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
85
2 Memory function* (for

storing seat, exterior
mirror and steering wheel
settings)
99
3 Seat adjustment
4 Switches for
opening/closing front door
windows
5 Switch for rear door
window override
6 Switches for
opening/closing rear door
windows
7 Remote trunk lid switch
28
Page
32, 92
200
70
200
87
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The Getting started section provides an
overview of the vehicles most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button* 4.
If you are already familiar with the basic

functions described here, the Controls in
detail section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The

locking knobs in the doors move up.
SmartKey with remote control
1 Lock button
2 Opening button for the trunk lid
3 Unlock button
4 Panic button* ( page 71)
30
Press unlock button on the

SmartKey.
Get in the vehicle and insert the

SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see Locking and

unlocking ( page 82).
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey

The steering is locked when the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch. If necessary, move steering
wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
1 Power supply to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
Check the battery and charge it if

necessary ( page 323).
Get a jump start ( page 326).
To prevent accelerated battery

discharge and a possible dead battery,
always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
31
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and

rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicles
equipment.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

The seat back and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be
adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
your seat belt ( page 40).
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck.
32
According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicles
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturers instructions.

SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the drivers or front passenger door open.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Children 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
Never place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Warning!
Warning!
Warning!
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Adjusting
A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is

significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Manual seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
Lift handle 1.
Slide seat to the desired position.
Allow handle 1 to reengage.
Check for proper engagement before

driving.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward until your upper legs are lightly
supported
Seat backrest tilt
Press switch 3 in direction of arrow

until your arms are slightly angled
when holding the steering wheel.
Seat height
Press switch 4 in direction of arrow

until your legs are lightly supported.
i
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat cushion tilt
3 Seat backrest tilt
4 Seat height
When moving the seat, be sure that

there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height
Warning!
Head restraint tilt
For your protection, drive only with properly

positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
1 Release button
Raising:
Manually adjust the height of the head

restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
To lower head the restraint, push

release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
34
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat

head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Manually adjust the angle of the head

restraint.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the

head restraint cushion.
For more information, see Seats

( page 92).
Getting started
Adjusting
Power seat* adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
The seat adjustment switches are located

in each front door.
Press switch forward or backward in

direction of arrow 4.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
Seat backrest tilt
i
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Seat backrest tilt
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch

to position 1 or 2 ( page 31).
Press switch up or down in direction of

arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Press switch forward or backward in

direction of arrow 5 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
When moving the seat, be sure that

there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
Seat height
The memory function* ( page 99) lets

you store the setting for the seat position together with the settings for the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors.
Head restraint height

arrow 2.

arrow 1.
or
Open the drivers or front passenger

door.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
Head restraint tilt
Steering wheel

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.

head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Manually adjust the angle of the head

restraint.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the

head restraint cushion.
For more information, see Seats

( page 92).
36

your vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature* can also be operated with the
drivers door open. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*
Do not drive the vehicle until you have

properly locked the steering column.
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is

located on the steering column (lower left).
If the warning message STEERING

WHEEL ADJ. - LOCK! ( page 298) is
displayed while the engine is running,
the steering column is not locked.
1 Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull

handle 1 out to its stop limit.
Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
To lock the steering column, push
handle 1 all the way in until it
engages.
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out

2 Adjusting steering column, up or down

to position 1 or 2 ( page 31).
or
Open the drivers door.
The steering wheel is once again

locked into position.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting steering column in or out
Move stalk forward or back in the

direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached
with your arms slightly bent at the
elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
Move stalk up or down in the direction

of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
i
you store the setting for the steering
wheel together with the settings for the
seat position and exterior rear view
mirrors.
Mirrors
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view

mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte

may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Interior rear view mirror
Manually adjust the interior rear view

mirror.
For more information, see Rear view mirrors ( page 149).
38
Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger

side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
Press button 1 for the left mirror or

button 3 for the right mirror.
Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror

button
2 Adjustment button
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
If an exterior rear view mirror was

forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), reposition it by
applying firm pressure until it snaps
into place. The mirror housing is now
properly positioned and you can adjust
the mirror normally.
i
you store the setting for the exterior
rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat
position.
i
At low ambient temperatures, the
mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position*
( page 150).
Make sure the ignition is switched on.

All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!
Do not lay any objects in the drivers footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the drivers footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Fastening the seat belt
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving

off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
Warning!

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries

can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts ( page 60).

1
40

Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Driving

restraint.
Warning!
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle

than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt.

backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the Safety and Security
section ( page 58) and ( page 60).
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
With a smooth motion, pull the belt

from the belt outlet.
Place the belt over your shoulder.
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until
it clicks.
41
Getting started
Driving
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to

a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Proper use of seat belts
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder

portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm). For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet.
Seat belt height adjustment

Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is
located as close as possible to the middle
of your shoulder (it should not touch the
neck).
Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Never use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time.
Front seats
4 Button for belt outlet height adjustment
Press button 4 and slide belt outlet

upward or downward.
42
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
Check your seat belt during travel to

ensure that it is properly positioned.
Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Warning!
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They

could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
Warning!
Manual transmission
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to

your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.
Starting
Depress brake pedal.
Make sure the gearshift lever is in

neutral position (no gear selected).
Fully depress clutch pedal.

Otherwise the engine cannot be
started due to the integrated safety
interlock.
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
For more information, see Manual transmission ( page 141).
Do not depress the accelerator.

to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts ( page 31).
For information on turning off the engine,

see Turning off engine ( page 52).
43
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission*
Starting
Starting difficulties
Make sure the gear selector lever is set

to P.
If the engine does not start as described,

carry out the following steps:
Do not depress the accelerator.

to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts ( page 31).
Turn SmartKey in starter to position 0

and repeat starting procedure
( page 43).
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start ( page 326).
i
You can also use the touch-start
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again
immediately. The engine then starts
automatically.
Gearshift pattern for automatic

transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever

lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see Automatic
transmission* ( page 142).
44
If the engine does not start after several

starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine,

see Turning off engine ( page 52).
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.
Getting started
Driving
Parking brake
Release parking brake by pulling on

handle 1.
The warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Driving
Depress the brake pedal.
Move gear selector lever to position D

or R (manual transmission: first or
reverse gear).
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake
Warning!

the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic
locking using the control system
( page 133).
!
Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the
brake reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain
wear.
Release the brake pedal.
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Carefully depress the accelerator.
Release the parking brake.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
45
Getting started
Driving
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
transmission.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
46
Warning!

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
For more information on driving, see Driving instructions ( page 239).
Switching on headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
Turn switch to B.
For more information on headlamps, see

Lighting ( page 102).
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals and high beam
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
The combination switch is on the left of the

steering column.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
Push combination switch forward.

The high beam symbol A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
For more information on high beam, see

Combination switch ( page 105).
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right

2 Turn signals, left
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
Press combination switch up 1 or

down 2.
47
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
Single wipe
Vehicles with rain sensor*:

Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
Turn the combination switch to the

desired position depending on the
intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed

III Fast wiper speed
i
Vehicles without rain sensor*:
Fast wiper speed III goes to setting II
when the vehicle is standing still.
Vehicles with rain sensor*:
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. Wiping
will not occur with a front door open.
48
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
Press combination switch briefly in

The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
Push combination switch in direction of

arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 259).
Getting started
Driving
!
Problems while driving
If anything blocks the windshield

wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch
them off immediately.
The engine runs erratically and misfires
For safety reasons, withdraw

SmartKey from starter switch
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on

again.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
Unburned gasoline may have entered

the catalytic converter and damaged it.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
Give very little gas.
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as

soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
An ignition cable may be damaged.
If windshield wipers fail to function at

all in switch position I,

Center.
major assemblies
set the combination switch to the

next highest wiper speed
The coolant temperature is over 248F

(120C)
fuel system
engine mount:
have the windshield wipers

checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
The coolant is too hot and is no longer

cooling the engine.
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible

and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( page 257).
49
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before

removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
the SmartKey is removed.
Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no

power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
50
Warning!
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to

position P (manual transmission: first or
reverse gear).
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front

wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch

position 0 and remove.
Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle

when leaving.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake
Step firmly on parking brake 2.

When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster will be illuminated.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!

the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
Warning!
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Switching off headlamps
Turn the exterior lamp switch

to M ( page 46).
For more information on headlamps, see

Lighting ( page 102).
Always set the parking brake in addition to

shifting to position P (manual transmission:
first or reverse gear).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine
Place the gear selector lever in

position P (manual transmission: first
or reverse gear).
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (manual
transmission: first or reverse gear).
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels

to position 0 and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
52
Press the seat belt release button

( page 41).
Allow the retractor to completely
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
drivers door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicles exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always

keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock

button on the SmartKey
( page 30).
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Warning!

your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
For more information, see Locking and

unlocking ( page 82).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
53
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster ( page 22) comes on:
The restraint systems are
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Airbags
Child seats
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children

(LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective

effects work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
children, see Children in the vehicle
( page 63).
54
for about four seconds when you turn

the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly

after you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
for about four seconds when you start

the engine by turning the SmartKey.
fails to extinguish after approximately

four seconds.
does not come on at all.
comes on after the engine was started

or while driving.
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if

the SmartKey is turned to position 2
and left there. The indicator lamp will
go out when you start the engine.
For safety reasons, we strongly

recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
For more information, see Practical hints
( page 278).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
In the event that the SRS malfunction indicator lamp comes on during driving or does
not come on at all, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems,
including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential

of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front airbags), or side impacts (side
impact airbags and head protection window
curtain airbags). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and
fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front

airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
Sit properly belted in an upright position

with your back against the seat back
rest.
55
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the drivers breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not lean with your head or chest

close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
Keep hands on the outside of steering

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
56
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as

possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
Failure to follow these instructions can

result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
Occupants, especially children, should

never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always
sit upright, properly use the seat belts
and appropriate size infant or child
restraint system.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible

to make the buyer aware of these points.
Make sure to give the buyer this Operators
Manual.
Children 12 years old and under must

never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

Automotive Corp.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please

follow these guidelines:
Accident research shows that the safest

place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM1 child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
(1) Occupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side airbag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side
airbag be activated.
Warning!
It should be noted that with respect to both

front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
1

Automotive Corp.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat

belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear door
mounted side airbags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal impacts (front airbags)
and in side impacts (side impact and
head protection window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deployment tresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should
always wear their seat belts. Otherwise
it is not possible for airbags to provide
their supplemental protection.
57
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
In cases of other frontal impacts,
angled impacts, roll-overs, other side
impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
We caution you not to rely on the
presence of the airbags in order to
avoid wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
58
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,

emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
No modifications of any kind may be

made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag
cover, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between airbags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.
Do not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were

highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Airbags and emergency tensioning

devices (ETDs) are designed to function
on a one-time only basis. An airbag or
ETD that was activated must be
replaced
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
An airbag system component within the

steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
Improper work on the system, including

incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly

urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operators Manual.
Driver and passenger airbags are

deployed:
Front airbags
In addition, through improper work

there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
in the event of a frontal impact
if impact exceeds a preset deployment

threshold
independently of the side impact

airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts

which do not exceed the systems
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be
deployed if:
For your protection and the protection

of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
1 Drivers airbag
2 Passenger front airbag
the front passenger seat is occupied
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp

in the center console is not lit
( page 66)
the impact exceeds a preset

deployment treshold
59
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system's deployment threshold.
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
The window curtain airbags 1 fill up the
area between the A and C pillars (see
arrows).
The side impact airbags and window

curtain airbags are deployed:
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts exceeding a preset

deployment threshold
independently of the front airbags
The front passenger side impact airbag will

only deploy if the system senses that the
front passenger seat is occupied.
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are not deployed in
impacts which do not exceed the systems
deployment threshold.
lamp < illuminates and a warning

chime sounds for approximately six
seconds when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
For more information on seat belts, see
Fastening the seat belt ( page 40).
i
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts. If the drivers seat
belt is not fastened before the engine is
started, the seat belt non-usage warning
1 Window curtain airbag
2 Side impact airbags
60
For information on infants and children

traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
children, see Children in the vehicle
( page 63).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving

off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!

backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
Warning!
Warning!
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly

stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
Never let more people ride in the vehicle

than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt.
61
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you wouldnt have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable

objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
Pregnant women should also use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument

panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Seat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat

belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag, passenger front airbag, side impact airbags,
head protection window curtain airbags
for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat
knee bolsters. The system is designed
to enhance the protection offered to
properly belted occupants in certain
frontal (front airbags) and side (side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset
deployment thresholds.
62
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases when the seat belts are
fastened:
in frontal or rear-end impacts

exceeding a preset severity level.
if the restraint systems are operational

and functioning correctly.
See 1 indicator lamp ( page 54).
In an impact, emergency tensioning

devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters
reduce the force exerted by the seat belts
on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that

was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
Secure the child using an infant or child

restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system's deployment threshold.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Infant and child restraint systems
Only use a BabySmartTM1 compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.

Automotive Corp.
63
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the drivers
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
64
For information on child seats with

anchor fittings for tether anchorages,
see Installation of infant and child restraint systems ( page 68).
The use of infant or child restraints is

required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all Canadian provinces.
For information on child seat anchors LATCH-type ( page 69).
Infants and small children should be

seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while the

vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the
instruction manual provided with the
restraint.
Warning!

When using any infant or child restraint

system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturers instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.

1
Infants and small children should never

share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
restraint.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.

Automotive Corp.
65
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation

system
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
The system does not deactivate the

side impact airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
Special BabySmartTM compatible child

seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
66
The PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp

located in the center console will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed
or in starter switch position 0.

Automotive Corp.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special

child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2,
located in the center console comes on for
approximately six seconds and then goes
out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
( page 279).
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Warning!
Warning!
The BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible

child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
remains illuminated.
Never place anything between seat cushion

and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Please be sure to check the indicator every

time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell

phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to
come on during self-test or be continuously
lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.
Follow the manufacturers instructions for

installation of special child seats.
1

Automotive Corp.
67
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Warning!
Always lock backrest in its upright position

when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
Make sure the rear backrest is locked

in its upright position ( page 213).
Remove cover 1 from anchorage

ring 3.
Guide tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
Head restraint must be installed (if

removable) and positioned such that
the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of
seat back.
i
For safety, make sure the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
Make sure the tether strap is not

twisted.
68
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part

of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
Reinstall cover 1 after removing the

tether strap.
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
Child seat anchors LATCH-type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a LATCH-type
child seat with the matching mounting
fittings.
Install child seat according to the

manufacturers instructions.
i
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchors 1.
With a child seat installed in the left
rear seat, the seat belt for the center
seat occupied by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat belt between
its seat cushion mount and backrest
mount along outside of right side child
seat anchor.
If a child seat is not installed, the

LATCH-type anchors can be folded back
between the seat cushion and the
backrest.
To fold anchors back
Press down button 2 on each anchor

and return anchor 1 to its catch.
Warning!
Children too big for child restraint systems

must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 1 are folded out and locked in
place.
Install child seat according to manufacturers instructions.
i
1 Anchors
2 Button
Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold

forward until they audibly lock in place.
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also

be used and can be installed using the
vehicles seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturers
instructions.
69
Safety and Security

Occupant safety
The child seat must be firmly attached in the

right and left side anchors 1.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Blocking of rear door window operation

The override switch is located on the door
control panel of the drivers door.
Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or

child seat anchors 1 must be replaced.
i
Operation of the rear door windows
with the switches located on the door
control panel of the drivers door is still
possible.
Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
1 Override switch
Slide override switch 1 to the right.

The rear door windows can no longer
be operated using the switch located in
the rear doors.
Activate the override switch when children

are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment can cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
For more information, see Power windows ( page 200).
70
Safety and Security

Panic alarm*
Panic alarm*
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21/2 minutes.
Activating
Press and hold button 1 for at least

one second.
Deactivating
Press button 1 again.
or
1 button
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
Canada only:
button 1.
71
Safety and Security

In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
ABS
ABS (Antilock Brake System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of

accidents:
Warning!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
Excessive speed, especially in turns
4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic

Traction System)
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,

steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
i
In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and
4MATIC (if so equipped) is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires),
or snow chains as required.
The ABS, BAS, ESP and 4MATIC (if so

equipped) cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates

the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even with light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster ( page 22) comes on when you
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running.
72
Safety and Security

Braking
Emergency brake maneuver
At the instant one of the wheels is about to

lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the

brake pedal while experiencing the
pulsation.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure

yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions
and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
BAS
Keep continious full pressure on the

brake pedal.
Warning!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of

physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the users safety or the safety of others.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in

emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.

( page 274).
73
Safety and Security

Warning!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of

it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
users safety or the safety of others.

( page 281).
74
ESP
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting engine output, the ESP
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes when the ESP is
engaged.
speedometer comes on when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Never switch off the ESP when you see the

ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
speedometer. In this case, proceed as
follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle

as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving style to

the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could

cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Safety and Security

Warning!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of

it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
users safety or the safety of others.
!
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
Switching off the ESP
!
Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because of the ESPs automatic
operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when
the parking brake is being tested on

a brake test dynamometer
the vehicle is being towed with the

front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP

may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
For information on vehicles with
4MATIC, see Four wheel electronic
traction system (4MATIC) with the
ESP ( page 77).
( page 277) and ( page 282).
Warning!
The ESP should not be switched off during

normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off

the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
starting out on slippery surfaces and in

deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
in sand or gravel
75
Safety and Security

The switch is located on the center
console.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,

the ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes, regardless of the speed.
Press upper switch position 1.

speedometer comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
76
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel

even when the ESP is deactivated.
When the ESP warning lamp v is

illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
The ESP always operates when you are

braking, even when it has been deactivated.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
!
1 ESP off
2 ESP on
Warning!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an

extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drive train which is not covered by
Switching on the ESP
Press lower switch position 2.

speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode.
Safety and Security

Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with the ESP
Models with all-wheel-drive only.
The 4MATIC improves vehicles ability to
use available traction, e.g. during winter
operation in mountains under snowy
conditions, by applying power to all four
wheels.
Warning!
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer, proceed as follows:
!
Performance testing must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
While driving off, apply as little throttle

as possible
Otherwise the transfer case can be

damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator
Adapt your speed and driving style to

the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could

cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
!
Do not tow with one axle raised.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Because of the ESPs automatic

operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
77
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm system*
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized

persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a

visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Activating
Removing the SmartKey from the

starter switch activates the
immobilizer.
Deactivating
Inserting the SmartKey in the starter

switch deactivates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicles battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
78
a door
the trunk lid
the hood
The alarm will stay on, even if the

activating element (a door, for example) is
immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
opening the vehicle with the

mechanical key
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is
initiated automatically by the Tele Aid
system* ( page 223) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn
signal lamps flash three times to indicate
that the alarm system is activated. A red
indicator lamp in the switch for the
tow-away alarm ( page 79) begins to
flash after approx. ten seconds after
arming the alarm system.
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system
Tow-away alarm*
If the turn signal lamps do not flash

three times, one of the following
elements may not be properly closed:
The alarm system is disarmed when you

unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The
turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is deactivated.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual

and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
a door
the trunk lid
i
The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if
no door or the trunk lid was opened.
Close the respective element and lock

the vehicle again.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:
Insert the SmartKey in the starter

switch.
or
Press the or button on the

SmartKey.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is
triggered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is
initiated automatically by the Tele Aid
system* ( page 223) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
79
Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
The switch is located on the center

console.

Indicator lamp 2 in switch comes on
briefly.
Exit and lock your vehicle with the

SmartKey.
When you unlock your vehicle, the

tow-away protection disarms
automatically.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed

until you lock your vehicle again.
Disarming tow-away alarm
Canceling the alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,

switch off the tow-away alarm feature
before towing the vehicle, or when parking
on a surface subject to movement, such as
a ferry or auto train.
To cancel the alarm:

1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
or
Switch off the ignition and remove the

SmartKey.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is switched on.
80

switch.
Press the or button on the
SmartKey.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
81
Controls in detail
In the Controls in detail section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
Getting started section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap
i
You can also open and close the power
windows ( page 202) and
sliding/pop-up roof* ( page 204)
from outside using the SmartKey.
82
SmartKey with remote control
1 Lock button
2 Opening button for the trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Panic button* ( page 71).
i
Canada only:
button* 6.
Controls in detail
!
Global locking
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid

exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
Factory setting
Global unlocking
Press button .
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The vehicle will lock again automatically

within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
neither door nor trunk is opened
the SmartKey is not inserted in the

starter switch
the central locking switch is not

activated
Press button .
All turn signal lamps flash three times.

The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Global locking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing only unlocks the drivers
door and the fuel filler flap.
Global unlocking
Press and hold buttons and

simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
flap
Press button once.
Press button twice.

Press button .
Restoring to factory setting
Press and hold buttons and

simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
Warning!

SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
83
Controls in detail
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
Check the batteries in the

SmartKey ( page 84) and replace
them if necessary ( page 307).
or
Use the mechanical key to unlock

the doors ( page 305) and the
trunk lid ( page 306) as required.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,

contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If the batteries are checked within

signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the or button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Checking the batteries
Press button or .
Battery check lamp 5 comes on
briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid

You can unlock and open the trunk
separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Press button until trunk unlocks

and begins to open.
or
Replace the batteries ( page 307).
Use the mechanical key to lock the

doors ( page 306) and the trunk
lid ( page 306) as required.
You can obtain the required batteries

at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The trunk lid swings open upwards

automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.
or
84
Have the vehicle battery and the

battery connections checked.
The trunk can also be opened from its

inside in an emergency, see Trunk lid
emergency release ( page 88).
Controls in detail
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still

locked separately (if applicable)
( page 89).
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,

you should do the following:
If the vehicle was previously centrally

locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed ( page 87). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an

Report the loss of the SmartKey or the

mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced.
Opening the doors from the inside

are safe to do so.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
Pull on door handle 2.

If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
85
Controls in detail
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Opening the trunk
Opening the trunk from the outside


The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
Press button or on the

SmartKey.

( page 89).
The vehicle must be unlocked.

switch.
The trunk can also be opened using the

SmartKey, see Unlocking and opening the
trunk lid ( page 84) or from its inside in
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency
release ( page 88).
1 Handle
Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens.
86
Controls in detail
Opening the trunk from the inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if

the vehicle is stationary.


The switch is located on the drivers door.
i
( page 89).
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed ( page 87). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator

lamp
Press remote trunk lid switch 1.

The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
in the switch remains lit as long as the
trunk is open.
Closing the trunk
The trunk can also be opened using the

SmartKey, see Unlocking and opening the
trunk lid ( page 84) or from its inside in
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency
release ( page 88).
1 Handle
Lower trunk lid using handle 1.
Close trunk lid with hands placed flat

on it.
Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always

keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
87
Controls in detail
Warning!
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among

other dangers, such as your view being
blocked, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
Trunk lid emergency release
The emergency release button is located

on the inside of the trunk lid.
The emergency release button unlocks

and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing or driving.
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
1 Emergency release button
Briefly press emergency release

button 1.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
!
automatically.
88
The button will flash for 30 minutes

after opening the trunk.
The button will flash for 60 minutes

after closing the trunk.
Controls in detail
Separately locking the trunk
i
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle
battery is discharged or disconnected.
i
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens.
following:

SmartKey.
switch.
The lock is located next to the recessed

handle.
i
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
function permitting the separate locking of the trunk using the mechanical
key. If present, this feature can permit
you to deny any unauthorized person
access to the trunk by locking the trunk
separately and leaving the SmartKey
less the mechanical key with the
vehicle.
To verify the presence of this feature,
use the mechanical key to lock the
trunk and then attempt to open the
trunk by pulling on the trunk lid handle
after the vehicle has been centrally
unlocked with the SmartKey.
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Close the trunk lid ( page 87).
Pull the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey ( page 305).
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk

lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

position 2.
The trunk remains locked even when the

vehicle is centrally unlocked.
89
Controls in detail
i
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
Separately unlocking the trunk
Pull the mechanical key out of the

Insert the mechanical key in the trunk

lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key

counterclockwise to neutral
position 1 ( page 89).
You can now open the trunk ( page 86).

90
Warning!
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among

other dangers, such as your view being
blocked, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
Automatic central locking

The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand
For more information on towing the vehicle, see see Towing the vehicle
( page 328).
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system, see Setting automatic locking ( page 133).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The switch is located in the center console.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the

trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.

access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Press lower switch position 2 of

central locking switch.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
are safe to do so.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or

unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!
Unlocking
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Locking
Press upper switch position 1 of

central locking switch.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.

locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.
while in the global remote control

mode, the complete vehicle is
unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
91
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see
Seats ( page 32).
Easy-entry/exit feature*
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
drivers seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the drivers door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the
starter switch and the drivers door is
closed, the steering wheel and the drivers
seat return to their last set positions.
92
You can activate the following functions:
You must make sure no one can become

trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and the drivers seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature* is activated, the
drivers door is being opened and the engine
is turned off or the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch.
Only the steering column is adjusted.
Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could open the drivers
door and unintentionally activate the
easy-entry/exit feature*, which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Steering column:
Steering column and seat:
The steering column and the seat are
adjusted.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be

switched on or off in the convenience
submenu of the control system
( page 133).
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel
movement, do one of the following:
Press the seat adjustment switch*

( page 28)
Move the steering column stalk*

( page 37)
Press the memory button*

( page 28)
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
For information on head restraint
adjustment, see Seats ( page 32).
Warning!
Removing front seat head restraints
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier

removal and installation of the head
restraints.
Pull head restraint to its highest

position.
Push release button 1 and pull out

head restraint.
Front seat head restraints, manual seat
Installing front seat head restraints

Insert head restraint and push it down

until it engages.

Push release button 1 and adjust

head restraint to desired position.

1 Release button
Do not interchange head restraints from

front and rear seat.
93
Controls in detail
Seats
Front seat head restraints, power seat*
Rear seat head restraints
Lowering:
Head restraint height (rear outer seats)
To lower the head restraint, push

release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
Warning!

Removing front seat head restraints
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until

head restraint is fully extended.
Pull out head restraint.
1 Release button
Raising:
Installing front seat head restraints
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for

about five seconds.
Push head restraint down until it

engages.
Adjust head restraint to desired

position ( page 35).
94
Manually adjust the height of the head

restraint by pulling it upward.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
push release button 1 and pull the
head restraint out.

head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
!
The center rear seat head restraint
cannot be adjusted.
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding head restraints back with
release button
Folding head restraints back with

switch in the center console
The rear seat head restraints can be folded

backward for increased visibility.
Warning!
For safety reasons, always drive with the

rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
Placing head restraints upright

1 Head restraint release switch
1 Release button
Push release button 1.

The head restraints will fold backward.
i
You can also fold the head restraints
back using the switch in the center
console ( page 95).
Start the engine.
Press the symbol-side on the rocker

switch 1 to release the head
restraints.
The head restraints will fold backward.
Pull the head restraint forward until it

locks into position.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
!
Make sure the head restraints engage
when placing them upright. Otherwise
their protective function cannot be assured.
Head restraint tilt
Two different head restraint angle
positions are available.
Press the release button ( page 95)

and tilt the head restraint to the
desired position.
Removing and installing rear seat head

restraints (outer seats)
Warning!

Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
!
The center rear seat head restraint
cannot be removed.
96
1 Release button
Removing rear seat head restraints
Fold back head restraint ( page 95).
Pull head restraint to its highest

position.
Push release button 1 and pull out

head restraint.
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing rear seat head restraints
Insert head restraint and push it down

until it engages.
Push button 1 and adjust head

restraint to desired position.
Multicontour seat*
This multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right
side of the seat after starting the engine.
Seat cushion depth
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the

length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Backrest contour
Adjust the contour of the backrest to

the desired position using switches 2
and 3.
Backrest side bolsters
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so

that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
1 Seat cushion depth

2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment
Start the engine.
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Heated seats*
Both switches for the front seats are
located in the center console.
Switching on seat heating
Switching off rapid seat heating

A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
Switching off seat heating
Press upper switch position 1 again.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating

All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Switching on rapid seat heating
Press lower switch position 2.

Both red indicator lamps on switch
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp
remains lit.
98
Press lower switch position 2 again.
!
If one or both of the indicator lamps on
the seat heater switch are flashing,
there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers
are turned on. The seat heater switches
off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Memory function*
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to
ensure adequate control, reach and
comfort. The head restraint should also
be adjusted for proper height. See also
the section on airbags ( page 55) for
proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and
exterior rear view mirrors should be
adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
The memory button and stored position

switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
Drivers seat and backrest position
Steering wheel position
Drivers side exterior rear view mirror

position
Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position
Front passenger seat position
Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while

driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
These key-dependent memory settings

can be deactivated if desired
( page 135).
99
Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position
button are located on the door.
1 Memory button
2 Stored position button
Make sure the ignition is switched on

or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and

rear view mirrors to the desired position ( page 32).
Turn button 2 to selected memory

position.
Turn button 2 to selected memory

position.
Press memory button 1.
Press and hold button 2 until the seat,

steering wheel and rear view mirrors
have fully moved to the stored positions.
Release memory button and push

button 2 within three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the
selected position.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
Warning!
Do not operate the power seats using the

memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.
100
Controls in detail
Memory function*
parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position feature, see Setting parking position* for exterior rear view mirror
( page 136).
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror for each SmartKey.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror

with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
Press memory button 1.
Within three seconds, press bottom of

adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Memory button
2 Adjustment button
mirror button
Stop the vehicle.
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
Press button 3.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.
The passenger-side exterior rear view

mirror is selected.
101
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the
Getting started section ( page 46).
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Exterior lamp switch

The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on.
B Low beam plus parking lamps or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
102
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
If you remove the SmartKey and open

the drivers door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on, then
The low beam headlamps and parking

lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see ( page 102).
a warning sounds
$ appears in the multifunction

display
the message TURN OFF LIGHTS!

appears in the multifunction display
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
Automatic headlamp mode

The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically

switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,

activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
103
Controls in detail
Lighting
Canada only
With the daytime running lamp mode

activated, the low beam headlamps will
not switch off automatically.
When you shift from a driving position to

position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
i
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or
second stop ( page 102).
Daytime running lamp mode
Turn exterior lamp switch to

position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam

headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
104
For nighttime driving you should turn the

exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
Locator lighting and night security

illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section under Setting locator lighting
( page 130) and Setting night security
illumination ( page 131).
Switching on fog lamps
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be
activated when driving with the daytime
running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only) ( page 129).
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
( page 102).
Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,

only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
from U to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on front fog lamps
Fog lamps will operate with the parking

lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
Make sure the low beam headlamps

are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first

stop.
Switching on rear fog lamp
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp

cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or
second stop ( page 102).
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
The green indicator lamp beside

the lamp switch comes on.
Make sure the low beam headlamps

are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second

stop.
The yellow indicator lamp beside
the lamp switch comes on.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
105
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on high beams
Turn exterior lamp switch to

position B or to U
( page 102).
Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam indicator A on the
instrument cluster comes on.
Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
Switching on the hazard warning

flasher
All turn signals will flash.
The switch is located on the center console.
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signals will
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
High beam flasher
Press hazard warning flasher switch.
Pull combination switch briefly in

Switching off the hazard warning

flasher
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
Press hazard warning flasher switch

again.
i
If the hazard warning flasher was
activated automatically, also press
switch 1 to switch off the hazard
warning flasher.
106
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Activating automatic control
Deactivating automatic control
Press rocker switch 3 to center

position.
Interior lamps are switched on in
darkness, even when you:
The interior lighting remains switched

off, even when you:
unlock the vehicle
unlock the vehicle
open a door
open a door
remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch
remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a

preset time ( page 132).
1 Rear interior lights
2 Right front reading lamp
3 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
4 Left front reading lamp
Press the = symbol on rocker

switch 3.
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after
approximately five minutes, when the
SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Manual control
Switching all front interior lights on and
off
Press the W symbol on rocker

switch 3.
The front interior lights come on.
Press rocker switch 3 to center

position to activate the automatic
control.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching rear interior lights on and off
Press button V.
The lights in the rear passenger
compartment come on.
Press button V again.

The lights in the rear passenger
compartment go out.
Switching right front reading lamp on

and off
Press right button X.

The right reading lamp comes on.
Press right button X again.

The right reading lamp goes out.
Switching left front reading lamp on and

off
Press left button X.

The left reading lamp comes on.
Press left button X again.

The left reading lamp goes out.
108
Door entry lamps
Trunk lamp
The appropriate door entry lamp switches

on if a door is opened in darkness and if
the interior lighting is switched to automatic function.
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid

is opened.
The entry lamp switches off automatically

when the door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
exterior headlamps, the door entry
lamps will remain lit for approximately
five minutes.
If you leave the trunk open for an extended

period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately ten
minutes.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see At a glance ( page 22).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
open a door
turn on the ignition
press the reset button ( page 22)
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster

settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system ( page 126).
Instrument cluster illumination

Use the reset button ( page 22) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.
To brighten illumination
The instrument cluster illumination will

brighten.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicles exterior
lamps.
Turn the reset button in the instrument

cluster clockwise ( page 22).
To dim illumination
Turn the reset button in the instrument

cluster counterclockwise ( page 22).
dim.
109
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature display
Warning!
Driving when your engine is badly

overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine
compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle

and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
110
Excessive coolant temperature triggers

a warning in the multifunction display.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1 or 2.
Call up the trip odometer and main

odometer by pressing button
or on the multifunction steering
wheel ( page 114).
Press button j or k until the

coolant temperature display appears.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.

stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248F (120C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248F
(120C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer

denotes excessive engine speed.
Make sure you are viewing the trip

odometer and main odometer in the
multifunction display ( page 113).
If it is not displayed, press button
wheel until the trip odometer appears
( page 114).
Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster ( page 22) until
the trip odometer is reset.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in the

multifunction display ( page 23). For
information on how to select the unit of the
indicated temperature, i.e. degrees
Celsius (C) or degrees Fahrenheit (F),
see Selecting temperature display mode
( page 127).
111
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
112
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to
call up information about your vehicle
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control

system to find out when your vehicle is
next due for service, to set the language
for messages in the instrument cluster
display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems
(radio, CD player, cassette player) will
appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.
Warning!
Multifunction display
A drivers attention to the road and traffic

conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1 Outside temperature
2 Main odometer
3 Trip odometer
4 Automatic transmission program mode
5 Current gear selector lever position
6 Digital clock
The control system relays information to

the multifunction display.
113
Controls in detail
Control system
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display in the

speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
down/to decrease
up/to increase
3 Telephone*
to take a call
to end a call
4 Menu systems
for next menu
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
114
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
If you press button or

repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j

repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions

you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
Submenus in the Settings menu
( page 124).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
115
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
116
This is what you will see when you scroll

through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an

overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Standard display
AUDIO
NAVI*
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Trip computer
Telephone*
Commands/submenus
Coolant
Select radio station Activate route
temperature display
guidance
Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone

tion messages
settings
statistics after
book
start
Digital speedometer Operate CD

player*
Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for

ter submenu
statistics since
name in
the last reset
phone book
Call up FSS
Lighting
submenu
Check engine oil

level
Operate casette
player
Call up range
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
The headings used in the menus table

are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
You can select the functions in the

standard display menu with button k
or j.
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate

the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
If no audio equipment is currently turned

on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.
The first function displayed in each

menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Function
Page
Call up coolant temperature

display
110
Call up digital speedometer
118
Function
Page
Call up FSS
265
Select radio station
119
Check engine oil level
254
Select satellite radio station*
119
Operate CD player*
120
Operate cassette player
121
Display digital speedometer
Press button j twice.

The current vehicle speed is shown in
118
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
Turn on the radio ( page 176).

Vehicles with COMAND*:
Refer to separate operating
instructions.
Press button or repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned
station in the display.
Press button k or j repeatedly

until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the
setting for the station tuning
( page 132):
The next stored station is selected

(SP)
Station search
Select satellite radio station*

The Sirius-Satellite-Radio is treated as a
radio application.
Select SAT radio with the corresponding softkey in the radio menu.
i
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio
( page 181).
1 Station frequency
2 Waveband setting
3 Setting for station selection using
memory

instructions.
1 Channel name or number

2 SAT mode and preset number
3 Setting for station selection using
memory
You can also operate the radio in the

usual manner.
119
Controls in detail
Control system

until the desired channel is found.
Operate the CD player*
Turn on the radio and select the CD

player ( page 189).
instructions.
To select a CD from the magazine,

press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.

until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
i
Feature description is based on
preliminary information available at
time of printing.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see Satellite radio (SAT)*
(USA only) ( page 182).
instructions.
1 Current track
2 Current CD (for CD changer*)
120

until the desired track is selected.
Controls in detail
Control system
Operate the cassette player
Turn on the radio and select the

casette player ( page 186).
instructions.
until the settings for the cassette
currently being played are shown in the
display.
Press button j to fast forward to

the next track.
NAVI* menu
Press button k to rewind the

cassette to the beginning of the current
track.
The NAVI menu contains the functions

needed to operate your navigation system.

until you see the message NAVI in the
display.
If the navigation system is switched off,

the message NAVI OFF is shown in the
display.
If the navigation system is on, the

message NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the
display.
i
To select the reverse side of the tape,
press button below track number on
the audio system display, or enter
request on the COMAND* system
located in the center dashboard.
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for

instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
1 Current side
121
Controls in detail
Control system
Malfunction memory menu

Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What
information is shown in the display
depends on whether malfunctions have
actually occurred.
Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are only

indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owners
and/or drivers responsibility to maintain
the vehicles operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages ( page 280).
122

until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the
message in the display is:
NO MALFUNCTION
Malfunctions have occurred

If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. For malfunction and
warning messages, see Messages in
the display ( page 280).
Should any malfunctions occur while

driving, the number of malfunctions will
reappear in the display when the SmartKey
in the starter switch is turned to position 0
or removed from the starter switch.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
will then only see high-priority
messages in the multifunction display
( page 280).
1 Number of malfunctions
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two
functions:
The function RESET TO FACTORY

SETTINGS, with which you can reset all
the settings to the original factory
settings.
A collection of submenus with which

you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.

until the SETTINGS menu is seen in the
display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all

submenus to the factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not

be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. Approximately five seconds after
pressing the reset button for the
second time, the SETTINGS... menu
reappears in the display.
Press the reset button in the

instrument cluster ( page 22) for
approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to
confirm.
For safety reasons, the following

functions are not reset while driving:
the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE

function in the LIGHTING submenu
the SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT

function in the CONVENIENCE
submenu
Press the reset button again.

The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
Resetting the functions of a submenu
Press button k or j.
For each submenu you can reset all the

functions to the factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not

be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. Approximately five seconds after
pressing the reset button for the
second time, the SETTINGS... menu
reappears in the display.
In the display you see the collection of

the submenus.
Press button .
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.

Scroll down with the button, scroll up
with the button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button or .
124
Move to a function in the submenu.
Press the reset button ( page 22) in

the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to
confirm.
Press the reset button again.

All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
VEHICLE
Set time (hours)
Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode

(USA only)
(radio)
Activate easy-entry/exit feature
Set time (minutes)
Set locator lighting
Set key-dependency
Select time display mode
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
Select temperature display

mode
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Set automatic locking
CONVENIENCE
Set parking position for exterior

rear view mirror
Select speedometer display

mode
Select language
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Set time (hours)
Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu

via the SETTINGS menu. Use the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu to change
the instrument cluster display settings.
This function can only be seen with audio

system.
Function
Page
Set time (hours)
126
Set time (minutes)
126
Select time display mode
127
Select temperature display

mode
127
Select speedometer display

mode
128
Select language
128
The selection marker is on the hour

setting.
i
For information on setting the time,
refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
Move the selection marker with

the or button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
Set time (minutes)

This function can only be seen with audio
system.
Press button j or k repeatedly

until you see this message in the
display: TIME SETTINGS HOURS.
i
For information on setting the time,
refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
Select display (speed display or 129

126
Press or to set the hour.

Controls in detail
Control system

display: TIME SETTINGS MINUTES.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
Selecting time display mode
Selecting temperature display mode



display: 12/24 HOUR.

display: TEMP. INDICATOR.
The selection marker is on the current

setting.

setting.
Press or to set the minutes.
Press or to set the 12h or

24h time display mode.
Press or to set temperature

unit to degrees Celsius (C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (F).
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
Available languages:

German
English

display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
French
Italian
Spanish

setting.
Press or to set
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
128

display: TEXT.
setting.
Press or to select the

language to be used for the
multifunction display messages.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or


display: SELECT DISPLAY.
setting.
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available:
Function
Setting daytime running lamp mode

(USA only)

LIGHTING submenu.

display: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT
MODE.
Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 129

(USA only)
Set locator lighting
130
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
131

setting.
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 132

display permanently shown in the
multifunction display.
Press or to select manual

or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
With daytime running lamp mode

selected and the exterior lamp switch
at position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the
engine is turned on:
Parking lamps and low beam

headlamps
License plate lamps (in low ambient

light conditions)
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will

come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting
feature is activated, and the vehicle is
unlocked by SmartKey:

LIGHTING submenu.

display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to

another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
To activate locator lighting:
For safety reasons, resetting the

LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
( page 124) while driving will not
reset the daytime running lamp mode.
Make sure the function LOCATOR

LIGHTING is set.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to

position U.
In the display you will then see the

message: LIGHTING CANNOT BE
TOTALLY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING!.
130
The locator lighting switches off when the

drivers door is opened. It switches off
automatically after a period of approximately 40 seconds.

setting.

desired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
You can reactivate this function within

ten minutes by opening a door.
Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF

function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed.
When the delayed shut-off feature is activated and the exterior lamp switch is in
position U, the following lamps will remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch:

setting.
If you do not open a door after

removing the SmartKey, the lamps will
automatically switch off after
60 seconds.
To activate night security illumination:
Select delayed shut-off period

( page 131).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to

position U.
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
To select delayed shut-off period:
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps

LIGHTING submenu.

display: HEADLIGHTS DELAYED
SHUT-OFF.

desired lamp-on period.
You can select:
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated

You can temporarily deactivate the
delayed shut-off feature:
Before leaving the vehicle turn the

position 0.
Then turn it to position 2 and back

to 0.
131
Controls in detail
Control system
The delayed shut-off feature is

deactivated. It will reactivate as soon
as you reinsert the SmartKey in the
starter switch.

setting.

LIGHTING submenu.
display: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED
SHUT-OFF.
132
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the

SETTINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu
to make general vehicle settings. The
following functions are available:
Interior lighting delayed shut-off

Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior
lighting to remain lit during darkness after
the SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Vehicle submenu

desired lamp-on time period.
Function
Page
Set station selection mode

(radio)
132
Set automatic locking
133
You can select:
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated
Setting station selection mode

Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
function to select the manual or memory
station selection mode for the radio
( page 119).

VEHICLE submenu.
Controls in detail
Control system

display: PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE.
setting.

desired station selection mode.
Setting automatic locking
Convenience submenu
Use this function to activate or deactivate

the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the

SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE

VEHICLE submenu.

display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
You can select:
STATION SEARCH
MEMORY selects next stored station
submenu to change the settings for a

number of convenience features. The
following functions are available:
Function
Page
Activate easy-entry/exit
feature*
134
Set key-dependency
135
Set parking position for exterior 136

rear view mirror

setting.
Press or to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature*
Use this function to activate and
deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature.
When the feature is activated, the steering
wheel and drivers seat will move back to
facilitate exiting when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch
open the drivers door
However, the engine must be turned off.
134
Warning!
You must make sure no one can become

trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and the drivers seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature* is activated and
the drivers door is being opened and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the drivers door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature*, which could result in an accident
After entering the vehicle the steering

wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when you
close the drivers door with the

SmartKey in starter switch position 2.
you put the SmartKey in the starter

switch with the drivers door closed.
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel
movement, do one of the following:
press the seat adjustment switch*

( page 35)
move the steering column stalk*

( page 37)
press the stored position button*

( page 100)
Controls in detail
Control system

CONVENIENCE submenu.
display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE
ACTIVATE.
setting.
The following settings are available for

the easy-entry/exit feature:
OFF
The
easy-entry/exit
feature is
deactivated
STEERING COLUMN
Only the
steering column
is moved
Setting key-dependency
Use this function to set whether the
memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel and the mirrors should be stored
separately for each SmartKey ( page 99).

CONVENIENCE submenu.

display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
STEERING COLUMN + Both the

SEAT
steering column
and the seat are

moved

setting.
Press or to change the

easy-entry/exit setting.
Press or to set
key-dependency to ON or OFF.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position* for exterior
rear view mirror
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING

function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged.
For additional information, see Activating
exterior rear view mirror parking position* ( page 150).
Move the selection marker to the

CONVENIENCE submenu using the
or button.
136

display: MIRROR SETTING WHEN
PARKING.
setting.
Trip computer menu

Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle. The
following information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 137

start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
137
Call up range (distance to empty) 138
Press or to switch function

ON or OFF.
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Fuel consumption since last reset

until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.

Trip computer menu.

display: AFTER START.

display: AFTER RESET.
i
All statistics stored since the last
engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2
within this time period.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
1 Distance driven since start

2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average fuel consumption since start
4 Average speed since start
1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
4 Average speed since last reset

Trip computer menu.

until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
Press and hold the reset button in the

instrument cluster ( page 22) until
the value is reset to 0.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Call up range (distance to empty)

Trip computer menu.
display: RANGE.
In the display you will see the
calculated range based on the current
fuel tank level.
TEL menu*
Warning!
A drivers attention to the road must always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the
telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every
second.
138
Never operate radio transmitters equipped

with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu

to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
Switch on the telephone and

COMAND*.

steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the display.
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
If the telephone is off, the message in

the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
If the telephone is on:

The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the
display.
Answering a call
Vehicles with Audio system:

The signal strength is indicated in the
top right corner, for example S9. The
higher the number, the stronger the
signal from the cellular network.
When your telephone is ready to receive

calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:

The signal strength is indicated by bars
in the top left corner. The higher the
number of bars, the stronger the signal
from the cellular network.
Press button .
You have answered the call. In the
display you see the length of the call.
Ending a call
1 Signal strength
Press button .
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby
message.
This standby message indicates that your

telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.

until you see the TEL menu in the
display.
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT.
If you press and hold j or k for

longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
The control system stores the most

recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through your
entire phone book.
Cancel the quick search mode by

pressing .

until you see the TEL menu in the
display.
Press button .
Press button .
The system dials the selected phone
number.
When the message PLEASE WAIT

disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
Redialing
If the connection is successful, the

name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
140

until the desired name appears in the
display.
Press button .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
In the display you see the first number

in the redial memory.
If no connection is made, the

control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission
Manual transmission is standard
equipment on select models and not
available on all models.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels

For information on driving with a manual

transmission, see Manual transmission
( page 43).
Do not park this vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as grass, hay or
Do not exceed the maximum speed in the

individual gears. Refer to tachometer
( page 111) for engine speeds.
Warning!
Warning!
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, getting out of your vehicle with the
gearshift lever not engaged in first or
reverse gear and parking brake engaged is
dangerous.
Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged
first or reverse gear alone may not prevent
your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting
people or objects.
engaging first or reverse gear ( page 50).
This could result in drive wheel slip and

reduced vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
!
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine
damage that is not covered by the
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill

by using the clutch pedal. The clutch
may be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could move the gearshift lever, which could
result in an accident and/or serious injury.
Do not exceed the engine speed limits

( page 111).
Shifting into reverse
Warning!

in order to obtain braking action.
Stop the vehicle completely.
Pull gearshift lever up and shift

in R reverse.
141
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission is standard
equipment on select models and available
as optional equipment on other models
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the Getting
started section ( page 44).
Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
142
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
the gear selector lever position D with

gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 144)
the selected shift program (C/S)

( page 146)
the position of the accelerator pedal

( page 147)
the vehicle speed
The current gear selector lever position

and shift program (C/S) appear in the
multifunction display ( page 113).
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector

lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
When the gear selector lever is in

position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to

the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current

gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission ( page 144).
Warning!
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when

the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engines
max. speed would be exceeded.
Upshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to

the right in the D+ direction.

gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever

in the D+ direction until D reappears in

gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
Press and hold the gear selector lever

in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select

the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.

result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
143
Controls in detail
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmissions gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
The transmission shifts through

fourth gear only.

third gear only.
With this selection you can use

the braking effect of the engine.
Effect

second gear only.
Allows the use of engines

braking power when driving:
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating

conditions
The transmission operates in

first gear only.
For maximum use of engines

braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
144
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position
Effect
Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicles electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
( page 308).
Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
145
Controls in detail
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Warning!
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear

selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
shifting to position P ( page 50).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
146
Warning!

access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could move the gear selector lever from
position P, which could result in an accident
Program mode selector switch

The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
1 Program mode selector switch

S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
!
Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
Controls in detail
Press program mode selector

switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired shift program appears in
the multifunction display ( page 113).
Accelerator position
Select C for comfort driving:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
The vehicle starts out in second

gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
More throttle
Later upshifting
Traction and driving stability are

improved on icy roads.
Upshifts occur earlier even when

you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
The power transmission ratio for
gear selector lever position R
changes depending on the program
mode selected (S or C).
Your driving style influences the

transmissions shifting behavior:
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Ease on the accelerator when you have

reached the desired speed.
Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
Stop the vehicle.
Move gear selector lever to P.
Turn off the engine.
Wait at least ten seconds before

restarting.
Restart the engine.
Move gear selector lever to position D

(for second gear) or R.
Have the transmission checked at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The transmission shifts up again.
147
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Windshield wipers
More information on the windshield wipers
can be found in the Getting started
section ( page 47).
Intermittent wiping
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
Windshield wipers with rain sensor*
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
Switch on ignition.
Set the wiper switch to position I

( page 48).
After the initial wipe, pauses between

wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
148
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Wipers will
operate in the presence of water
sprayed on the windshield, and wipers
may be damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in
intermittent setting as the wipers will
wipe the windshield once every time
the engine is started. Dust that
accumulates on the windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
dry windshield.
Headlamp cleaning system*

The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
1 Headlamp washer switch
Switch on ignition.
Press switch 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 259).
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear view mirrors
Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors*
The rear view mirror will not react if
More information for setting the rear view

mirrors can be found in the Getting
started section ( page 38).
The reflection brightness of the exterior

rear view mirror on the drivers side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is turned on
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare

position
the ignition is switched on

and
incoming light from headlamps falls on

the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror.
Warning!
The automatic antiglare function does not

react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the drivers side do not
react, for example, if the rear window
sunshade* is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
1 Lever
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night

position by moving lever 1 towards
the windshield.
149
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact

with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte

may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
150
Activating exterior rear view mirror

parking position*
Press button 2 for the passenger-side

exterior rear view mirror.
Place the gear selector lever in reverse

gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
Follow these steps to activate the mirror

parking position so that the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
will be turned downward to the stored
position.
Make sure you have stored a parking

position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror ( page 101).
Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN

PARKING function in the CONVENIENCE
submenu of the control system is
switched to ON ( page 136).
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror

button
mirror button
Controls in detail
Good visibility
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
ten seconds after you put the gear

selector lever out of position R
immediately once your vehicle exceeds

a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
immediately when you press button 1

for drivers side mirror
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
Swing sun visors down when you

experience glare.
1 Mounting
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Sun visor
To use illuminated mirror, lift up

cover 2.
i
If sunlight enters through a side
window, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
The mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
151
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade*
Warning!
Warning!
The switch is located in the center console.

When operating the rear window sunshade,
make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately halted by briefly pressing the upper or lower half of the switch.

position 1 or 2.
Press upper switch position 1 briefly

to raise the sunshade.
Press lower switch position 2 briefly

to lower the sunshade.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
152
Briefly press upper or lower half of the

switch again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade completely.

SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically
deactivated after approximately
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature.
Activating
Climate control:
Press button F ( page 155).
Deactivating
Press button F again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning!
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be

removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
If the rear window defroster switches

off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
deactivating the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically turns itself back on.
Automatic climate control*:

Press button F ( page 163).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
153
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
154
Controls in detail
Climate control
Item
Item
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control

for left center air vent
1 Air volume control
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Right-side temperature control
3 Right center air vent, adjustable
4 Air distribution control

for right center air vent
5 Rear window defroster
2 Left-side temperature control
6 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
5 Air volume control for side air vent

6 Side air vent, adjustable
7 Air distribution and air volume

(automatic mode)
7 Side defroster vent, fixed
8 Air recirculation
8 Climate control panel
9 Defrosting
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the center air vents 2, 3
and 6 to the middle position.
Climate control panel
The storage compartment between the

front seats can be ventilated ( page 160).
155
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air

that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents in the footwell can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the footwell air vents. If necessary,
change the air flow using the air distribution
controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents ( page 157).
156
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and

odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the mode ACOFF is selected
( page 160).
Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
pollution) may require replacement of
the filter before its scheduled interval.
A clogged filter will reduce the air
volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing
objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
( page 155) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72F (22C).
Controls in detail
Climate control
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Adjusting air distribution and volume

Use air distribution control 4
( page 155) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
controls:
Increasing
Symbol
Function
Directs air through the center,

side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
Turn the temperature control 2 or 3

slightly to the right.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Decreasing
Turn the temperature control 2 or 3

slightly to the left.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Z
X
Directs air to the windows
Directs air to the footwells
Adjusting manually

out.
Select any of the six air volume speeds

and the air distribution.
Adjusting automatically
Press button U ( page 155).

comes on. The air distribution and
volume is adjusted automatically.
Directs air into the entire

vehicle interior
Use the air volume control 1

( page 155) to adjust the air volume. You
can select between six air volume speeds.
Press button U ( page 155).
Windshield fogged on the outside
Switch the windshield wipers on

( page 47).
Switch to manual mode.
Turn the air distribution control

to a or Y.
157
Controls in detail
Climate control
Defrosting
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
Press button P ( page 155).

comes on.
or
Switch off air recirculation, if selected.

Press button O ( page 155).
out.
Close center air vents ( page 155).
Open left and right side air vents

( page 155) and adjust side air vents
upwards.
158
Deactivating
Activating

out. Defrosting is turned off.

comes on.
Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
When the outside temperature is

below 41F (5C), only switch to air
recirculation mode for short periods to
prevent window fogging.
If you keep button O pressed the

side windows and sliding/pop-up roof*
will close.
Warning!
Never operate the side windows and the

sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
In the event that the closing procedure
causes potential danger, the closing of the
side windows can be immediately halted by
pressing or pulling the respective window
switch. The closing of the sliding/pop-up
roof* can be immediately halted by moving
the sliding/pop-up roof* switch in the
overhead control panel in any direction.
Controls in detail
Climate control
The closing of the side windows and

sliding/pop-up roof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the O button.
Deactivating

out.
The air recirculation mode is activated

automatically at high outside temperatures.
If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 160) or the outside
temperature is below 41F (5C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
If you keep button O pressed the

side windows and sliding/pop-up roof*
will return to their previous position.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
after five minutes if the outside

temperature is below
approximately 41F (5C)
after five minutes if the air conditioning

is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside

temperature is above
At outside temperatures above 79F

(26C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating
Set air volume control 1 ( page 155)

to position 0.
Reactivating
Set air volume control 1 ( page 155)

to any speed.
159
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Press button ( page 155).

comes on.
160
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

out.
The air conditioning uses the

refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free
of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone
layer.
Ventilated storage compartment

The front center console storage compartment has its own air vent that allows for
cooling ventilation when the automatic
climate control system is activated.
i
You should keep this air vent closed
when outside temperatures are low.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
1 Lever
Controls in detail
Climate control
Opening the air vent
Raise lever 1.

adjustable air vents
i
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
Do not obstruct the air vent in the

storage compartment.
Turn thumbwheel 2 upward.

The temperature at the center air vents
for the rear passenger
compartment 1 and 3 is the same as
at the dashboard center air vents.
Lower lever 1.
Closing the air vent
To open center air vents:
1 Left center air vent

2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
3 Right center air vent
161
Controls in detail
162
Controls in detail
Item
Item

for left center air vent
1 Temperature control, left, raising
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Left-side air distribution control

(automatic or manual mode)
3 Thumbwheel for adding outside air
3 Activated charcoal filter
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
4 Display

for right center air vent
5 Right-side air distribution control

(automatic or manual mode)

for side air vent
6 Temperature control, right, raising

7 Temperature control, right,
lowering
7 Side air vent, adjustable

8 Side defroster vent, fixed
9 Automatic climate control panel
Automatic climate control panel
8 Rear window defroster

9 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat/ventilation
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the center air vents 2, 4
and 7 to the middle position.
a Air volume control

b Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
c Air recirculation
d Defrosting
e Temperature control, left, lowering
163
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
164
Warning!
When operating the automatic climate

control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold
(depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary, change the air
flow using the air distribution controls to
direct the air away from the footwell air
vents ( page 166).
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and

odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
( page 170).
Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for

heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Controls in detail
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
pollution) may require replacement of
the filter before its scheduled interval.
A clogged filter will reduce the air
volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing
objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Setting the temperature

Use temperature controls 1 and e for
the left side or 6 and 7 for the right side
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72F (22C).
Increasing
Push temperature control 1

and/or 6.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Decreasing
When operating the climate control

system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Push temperature control 7

and/or e.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adding outside air
Turn thumbwheel 3 in dashboard

( page 163) to increase airflow of
outside air through air vents for center,
left and right sides and rear passenger
compartment.
165
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 2 and 5
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Symbol
Function
Directs air through the center,

side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
Adjusting manually
Press left or right U button

( page 163).
out.
Adjusting manually
Seven blower speeds are available.
Air distribution can be adjusted

manually.

( page 163).
Directs air to the windows

Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior

comes on.
Directs air to the footwells
The air distribution is adjusted

automatically.
Windshield fogged on the outside
Switch the windshield wipers on

( page 47).
Switch to manual mode.
Turn the air distribution control

to a or Y.
Press left M or right Q side of air

volume control ( page 163) until the
requested blower speed is attained.
The display AUTO disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.
Z
X
166
Adjusting air volume

( page 163).
comes on.
The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
Controls in detail
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
Defrosting
If the left and right air distribution controls

as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display MAXCOOL appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling

of the vehicle interior (when windows and
sliding/pop-up roof* are closed).
Activating
Deactivating

out. Defrosting is turned off.
These settings should only be selected

for a short time.

comes on.
or

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
Warning!

out.
When the outside temperature is

below 41F (5C), only switch to air
recirculation mode for short periods to
prevent window fogging.
Close center air vents ( page 163).
Adjust side air vents upwards

( page 163).
Activating

comes on.
167
Controls in detail
If you keep button O pressed, the

side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof* will close.
Warning!

closing procedure.
again pressing and holding the O button.
168
If you keep button O pressed, the

roof* will return to their previous
position.
The air recirculation mode is activated

automatically:
at high outside temperatures
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel (charcoal filter activated)
Please note that the charcoal filter
must be activated ( page 169) for
the air recirculation mode to be
activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air

conditioning ( page 170) or the outside temperature is below 41F (5C),
the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically.
Deactivating

out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated

automatically:
after five minutes if the outside

temperature is below
after five minutes if the air conditioning

is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside

temperature is above
At outside temperatures above 79F

(26C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Controls in detail
Charcoal filter
Warning!
An activated charcoal filter markedly
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
Press button e ( page 163).

comes on.
The system switches automatically to the

air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.
If you keep button e pressed, the

roof* will close.

closing procedure.
again pressing and holding the e button.
Deactivating
Press button e ( page 163).

out.
If you keep button e pressed, the

roof* will return to their previous
position.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if the ACOFF mode is selected
or if the outside temperature has fallen
below 41F (5C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
169
Controls in detail
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.

comes on.
170
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can

dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
If the air conditioning cannot be turned

on again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off.

out.
The air conditioning uses the

refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free
of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone
layer.
Have the air conditioning checked at

the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Deactivating
How long the system will provide

heating depends on the coolant
temperature and the temperature set
by the operator. The blower will run at
speed setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.

out.
The residual heat is automatically turned

off:
Activating
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops

to position 1 or 0, or remove it from
the starter switch.
comes on.
171
Controls in detail
Adjusting the air volume
Turn thumbwheel 2.
i
Four blower speeds are available.
The temperature at the center air vents
for the rear passenger
compartment 1 and 3 is the same as
at the dashboard center air vents.
1 Left center air vent

2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
3 Right center air vent
4 Closing center air vents
5 Opening center air vents
6 Switching on blower
172
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help

you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could

lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full
attention to traffic conditions first before
operating system controls while driving.
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Warning!
Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.

The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
radio*, telephone* and voice control system* are interconnected. When one of the
components is not operational or has not
been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
173
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
174
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 CD mode selector
189
5 Alpha-numeric keypad
2 Manual tuning
(radio)
179
Band selection,
station buttons (radio)
179
Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)
188,
192
CD selection (CD)
191
194
Speed dialing memory

(telephone*)
197
Telephone number entry,

retrieving speed dialing
memory (telephone)
3 Radio mode selector

4 Display panel
Cassette compartment
behind display panel
179
Page
9 Function keys
6 Scanning (radio, cassette,

CD)
181,
188,
192
7 Function button
180
8 Light-emitting diode
Item
a Cassette eject
187
b Cassette mode selector
186
c Telephone* mode selector
193
d Seek tuning (radio)
180
Track search (cassette,

CD)
187,
192
Speed dialing memory

(telephone)
197
e On/off
176
Volume
176
175
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as buttons. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
soft keys.
Operation
Switching on/off
Switching on:
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to

position 1 or 2 .
or
!
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise, the display will be
damaged.
Turn control knob a.
The volume will increase or decrease

depending on the direction turned.
i
The volume setting can be selected
separately for the telephone*, audio
system and voice control system*.
Adjusting audio functions
If the radio is switched on without the

SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after approx. 30 minutes.
Press the AUD key to call up the bass, treble, balance and fader functions in the various operating modes. Settings for bass
and treble are stored separately for the AM
and FM frequency bands, satellite radio
(SAT) mode, cassette mode and CD mode.
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
Switching off:
176
Adjusting the volume
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
Treble
Regardless of operating mode, press

the AUD key repeatedly until BASS
appears on the display.
Press + or - key to increase or decrease level.
or
Fader

the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE
i
Your vehicle may or may not have the
fader function, depending on the
vehicle equipment and model.

the AUD key repeatedly until FADER
Press F or R key to shift sound accordingly to the front or rear speakers.
Press + or - key to increase or

decrease level.
or
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Bass to its center (flat) level.
Press both + and - keys simultaneously

to reset the Treble to its center (flat)
level.
or
Press both F and R keys simultaneously

to reset the Fader to its center level.
177
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance

the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE
Returning audio functions to factory

settings
Press L or R key to shift sound accordingly to the left or right speakers.
or
Press both L and R keys simultaneously

to reset the Balance to its center level.
178

the AUD key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
Press the EXT key.
Press one of the function keys.

and hold AUD key longer than two
seconds. RESET will appear on the
display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to the center level and the
volume is set to a predefined level.
Controls in detail
Audio system
You can select from among the
following settings:
Radio operation
DRV: The tone level is set to the
Selecting radio mode
Driver position; sound is directed

toward the passengers.
Press b button.
You can now receive radio stations

over the analog FM, AM or WB station
frequencies or you can receive channels digitally via satellite radio (SAT)*.
SP: The tone level is set for Speech,
optimizing the sound for the spoken

word.
AMB: The tone level is set for
Press FM, AM or WB key repeatedly until desired band has been selected.
The FM, AM and WB frequency bands
are called up one after the other.
The frequency band currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
Selecting a station
Ambience, producing a
three-dimensional sound.
Analog station frequencies
The following options are available for

selecting a station:
OFF: The audio system sound
Selecting the band
selection is turned off.
You can select from among FM, AM or WB

frequency bands.
Direct frequency band input

( page 180)
Manual tuning ( page 180)
Automatic seek tuning ( page 180)
Scan tuning ( page 181)
FM frequency band:
FM
87.7......107.9 MHz
Preset buttons ( page 181)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)

( page 181)
Telephone* muting
If a telephone has been installed in the
vehicle, the radio will switch to telephone
mode when a call is incoming. The current
audio source is muted.
Weather band ( page 182).
AM frequency band:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
179
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
Automatic seek tuning
Select the desired frequency band.
Press and hold either the d or

c button until the desired
frequency is reached.
Press either the f or e button.
Press button.
Enter desired frequency using

buttons 4 to M.
i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within four
seconds, the radio will return to the
station last tuned to.
180
Step-by-step station tuning takes place

in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. Afterwards, the radio will be muted and
highspeed tuning will take place until
the button is released.
The radio will tune to the next higher or

next lower receivable frequency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
Manual station memory (Presets)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
Starting scan tuning
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations.
The Autostore memory function provides

an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
Select desired frequency band.
Storing stations
Tune in the desired station.
Press and hold desired station

button 4 to M until a brief
signal tone is heard.
Calling up Autostore memory level
Briefly press the AS key.

AS is highlighted in the display.
The radio finds the ten stations with

the strongest signals. These
stations are stored on the station
buttons 4 to M in order of
signal strength.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display. The
radio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the band selected. The
first scan cycle will tune in only the
stations with a strong signal. The
second scan cycle will tune in every
receivable station.
The frequency is stored on the

selected station button.
The frequency band and station
button number are shown in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
Ending scan tuning
Press 2 button or d, c,
f or e button.
SC disappears from the display.
Retrieving a station from memory
Press desired station button 4

to M.
Retrieving a station from memory
Press desired station button 4

to M.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
Press the AS key.

The highlighted AS in the display
disappears.
181
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only)
Press the WB key.

The weather band station last selected
is tuned in.
Select the desired weather band

station with buttons 4 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.
Press f or e button. The next

receivable weather band station is
tuned in.
182
Additional optional satellite radio

equipment and a subscription to
satellite radio service provider is required for the satellite radio operation
described here. Feature description is
based on preliminary information
available at time of printing.
At time of printing, no date for the
availability of optional equipment required for satellite radio operation had
been set. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details and
availability for your vehicle.
Satellite radio service may be unavailable or interrupted from time to time
for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions
and other things we can't control.
Service might also not be available in
certain places (e.g., in tunnels, parking
garages, or within or next to buildings)
or near other technologies.
Sirius Satellite Radio provides 100 channels of digital-quality radio, among others
music, sports, news, and entertainment,
free of commercials. Sirius Satellite Radio
uses a fleet of high-power satellites to
broadcast 24 hours per day
coast-to-coast.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information, call the Sirius service or contact www.siriusradio.com
Program categories
The channels are categorized. The categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program
(PTY mode) ( page 185).
Controls in detail
Audio system
Starting satellite radio (SAT)
Start radio mode.

If the radio was in SAT radio mode before being turned off or changed to another operating mode, the last SAT
channel selected is called up.
The first time SAT radio is called up, you

must give your SAT radio provider the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of your SAT receiver over the telephone.
or
Entering the Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)
Press the SAT key.

The radio switches to SAT mode.
CALL SIRI appears on the display.
Press the SAT key.

When you call up the SAT radio mode
for the first time, ACQUIRING will appear
on the display during the initialization
process.
Press the ESN key repeatedly until all

required information has appeared on
the display.
Call the telephone number and give

provider your ESN number.
i
Credit card information is also required
for your application.
The activation process takes approximately five to ten minutes after calling
the SIRIUS Service Center.
or
The last channel selected is called up.
Press the ESN key.

The providers phone number will appear first. After pressing the ESN key
again, the ESN number will appear.
Make note of the phone number and
ESN number.
183
Controls in detail
Audio system
Channel selection
The following options are available for selecting a channel:
Only inputs for available channels are

possible.
Direct channel input ( page 184)
Manual tuning ( page 184)
If a button is not pressed within four

seconds, the radio will return to the last
station tuned.
Preset channels ( page 184)
Direct channel input
Enter desired channel number using

buttons 4 to M.
184
Tune in the desired channel.
Press and hold desired channel

button 4 to M until a brief
signal tone sounds.
Press and hold f, d, c or

e button until the desired channel
has been reached.
You can store up to ten channels.

Press key.
Manual tuning
Preset channels
Storing channels
Retrieving a channel from memory
Press the desired channel

button 4 to M.
The channel is stored on the selected

channel button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Program type (PTY) mode
Selecting channel category
Program Descriptive Text (PDT)
In PTY mode, you can tune in and select

channels of a specific program type.
In PDT mode, you can call up additional information on the channel, the current track
and the performing artist(s).
Press d or c button.
The individual program types are selected.
Calling up PTY mode
Start SAT radio mode.
Tuning in a PTY channel
Press the PTY key.
Once you have selected a program type,

you can tune in channels broadcasting a
program that corresponds to the selected
program type.
The name of the channel currently

being received is shown.
Leaving PTY mode
Press the CH key.

The number of the channel currently
being received is shown.
Press f or e button.
The radio will tune to the next highest
or lowest channel broadcasting this
type of program.
Press the TXT key.

The station category appears on the
display.
Press the TXT key again within four

seconds.
The title of the current track appears.
Press the TXT key again within four

seconds.
The name of the musician(s) of the current track appear on the display.
185
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette operation
Playing cassettes
A warning signal will sound after 20

seconds if the display panel is left in
the down position. Fold display panel
back up. If the display panel is not
closed, a warning signal will sound and
the radio will be muted.

face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
Track selection
Insert cassette into the cassette compartment until it engages and tap it
gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automatically. The system switches to cassette
mode. Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1
appears in the display. Side 1 is the
side of the cassette which is facing upward. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape.
Press 3 button.
The display panel folds down and the
cassette compartment becomes accessible.
Fold display panel back up and press

gently on the display panel frame to
lock it in place.
or
If a cassette is already in the

mechanism, press j button.
The current track will be displayed as

SIDE 1 or SIDE 2.
186
Press the TRK key.
You can switch sides at any time.

The side will be changed automatically
at the end of the tape.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette eject
Press eject button 3.
Track search
Track search forward
Track search backward
The display folds down and the cassette is ejected. The system will switch
back to radio mode automatically.
SEEK RWD will appear on the display.

Track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to Play.
Fold display panel back up and press

gently on the display panel frame to
lock it.
Stopping track search
Press f button.

face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged.
SEEK FWD will appear in the display.
The cassette will not be ejected when

the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
Press e button.
Track search will run the tape forward

to the start of the next track and switch
to Play.
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to Play.
The beginning of a track can only be

found if there is pause of at least
four seconds between tracks.
187
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scanning
Starting scan
Starting cassette fast forward mode
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)

Switching on the skip blank function
Press the SB key.

SB is highlighted in the display.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear on the display.
Each track on the cassette will be

played briefly in ascending order.
Starting cassette fast reverse mode
Stopping scan
Press 2 , d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.
Press d button.
FORWARD will appear on the display.
Press c button.
REWIND will appear on the display.
The cassette will automatically switch over

to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.
Stopping the cassette fast forward/reverse mode
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.
188
If the system does not detect a sound

signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
Switching off the skip blank function
Press the SB key.

The highlighted SB in the display disappears.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
Switching on
To enable optimum sound reproduction of

cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR, the
Dolby NR system should be switched on.
i
The Dolby NR function should be
switched off when playing cassettes
not recorded with Dolby B NR.
Press the NR key.

NR is highlighted in the display.
Switching off
CD changer* operation
Press the NR key.

The highlighted NR in the display disappears.
General notes
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and the CD will be
muted. The unit will then switch back to
the last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
1
DOLBY and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints

and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any labels or other material to them.
189
Controls in detail
Audio system
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not
use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
cleaning. Replace the CD in its case after
use. Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
Your CD drive has been designed to

play CDs which correspond to the
EN 60908 standard.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
Warning!
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown

and that conform to the compact disc
digital audio standard (IEC 60908). You
can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
i
Use of CDs which do not meet this
standard may cause damage to the CD
changer. Do not play single-CDs
(80 mm) with an adapter.
190
The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.

There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
Operational readiness of CD changer

If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
Slide changer door to the right and

press eject button g.
The magazine will be ejected.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting CDs
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
Push magazine into CD changer in direction of arrow and close sliding door.
Playing CDs
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully

out.
Place CD in recess of tray, label side

up.
Push tray into magazine in direction of

arrow.
Press i button.
CD will appear on the display.
The last CD listened to will then start playing at the point where it was switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
You can select from among the CDs in

the CD magazine using buttons 4
to 6.
CD and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear on the display. The

number of the current track is displayed after TRACK.
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears on the display

with the corresponding slot number.
191
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forward/backward
Skipping tracks forward
Press f button.
Press e button.
If the track has been playing for
more than ten seconds, it will revert
to the start of that track. If it has
been playing for less than ten seconds, it will revert to the preceding
track.
Scanning
Press 2 button.
Each track on the current CD will be

played for approx. eight seconds in
ascending order.
192
Press the RDM key.

RDM is highlighted in the display.
SC appears in the display.
Press and hold d button until

desired point has been reached.
Switching on random play
Starting scan
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The random play function (RDM) plays the

tracks on the current CD in random order.
Pressing the f or e button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being

skipped.
Fast forward
Ending scan
Random play
The relative time of the track is shown

on the display during the search.
Skipping tracks backward
Press and hold c button until

desired point has been reached.
The next track will be played.
Fast reverse
Switching off random play
Press the RDM key.

The highlighted RDM in the display
disappears.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Repeat
Track and time display
The repeat function (RPT) repeats the current track.
Various car telephone* functions and operating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio system.
Switching on repeat:
Further operating instructions not covered

here can be found in the operating
instructions for the multifunction steering
wheel, voice control* and the telephone*.
Press the T key.
Press the RPT key.
The total number of tracks and the total

playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The highlighted RPT in the display disappears.
The CD main menu appears again after

eight seconds.
Switching off repeat:
Press the T key.

The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
Press the RPT key.

RPT is highlighted in the display.
Telephone* operation
i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.
193
Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching on the telephone
Switching off the telephone
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must enter
the code now.
Enter the desired telephone number

using buttons 4 to M.
If necessary, correct number entered

with the CLR key. Press key briefly to
delete the last digit entered; press key
and hold to delete the complete number.
Press the OK key after entering correct

code.
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered the wrong code, you must repeat the entering procedure with the
correct code.
194
Press h button repeatedly until

PHONE OFF appears in the display.
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
The receiving symbol in the display

disappears.
Adjusting the volume
Turn control knob a during telephone operation.

The volume increases or decreases depending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.
The number can have up to 32 digits,

but only 13 of these are visible on the
display.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for the telephone*, voice control system* and radio.
Enter the desired telephone number

using buttons 4 to M.
If necessary, correct number entered with

the CLR key.
Press key briefly to delete the last digit

entered.
Press key and hold to delete the complete number.
After correct telephone number has

been entered, press the SND key.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book can
be called up either by name or number.
Switching between name search and

number search
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letter.
Press the ABC key.

The name search is called up.
Calling up the phone book
or
or
Press the NUM key.
Searching and calling up phone book entries by name

Press d, c, f or
e button.

The stored entries are selected in
increments of four.
The number search is called up.
Press either the d or c button.
or
Press the desired numerical key 2

to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for B -Brown, press
button 2 twice).
Press the ABC key.
The current name is highlighted on the

display.
Several characters and symbols cannot

be shown on the display for technical
reasons. They have been replaced with
spaces.
195
Controls in detail
Audio system
Searching and selecting phone book entries by number
Starting dialing process
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
Once you have selected a number,

press the SND key.
Repeat dialing
Press the NUM key.

The current number is marked in the
display.
If the number dialed is busy, you can again

place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the repeat dialing function.
The last number dialed is shown in the

display.
Press either the d or c button.

The stored entries are selected
according to numerical order.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of 5 (e.g. Entry M5, Entry
M10,etc.)
196
Select the desired telephone number

using d, c, f or
e button.
The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.
or
Press the SND key.
When you have selected a number,

press the SND key.
The call will be made.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
Speed dialing
Quick-dialing
If a call cannot be connected, press

the SND key.
A maximum of two digits can be entered.
REDIAL will appear on the display and repeated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next four minutes.
Selecting numbers directly from the

directory
Enter previously selected 3-digit

(1-999) number of the entry using
number keys 4 to M.
Press the RCL key.
Input desired entry number using

number keys 4 to M.
If necessary, correct the last number

entered with the CLR key.
Press the SND key.

The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number, L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
Press one of the desired number

buttons 4 to M longer than one
second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.
Please be aware that button 4

might already be reserved for an emergency call number.
The telephone number stored under

that entry will be dialed.
Press the SND key.

The call will be made.
197
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency call
Press button 4 longer than one

second.
A call will be placed to the saved number (e.g. 911).
!
Please be aware that the 911 emergency call system is a public service. Using
it without due cause is a criminal offense.
You can make an emergency call to an
emergency rescue station with a mobile
communications network.
The emergency call will be placed as long
as the corresponding mobile communications network is available. To do this,
switch the telephone on if this has not already been done.
198
The call will also be placed even if the unlock code is not entered.
Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions
are active. Check with your local network
operation company. It may take some time
to set up an emergency call.
To use this function you must ensure that
the number stored in memory location 1 is
the number to be dialed in case of emergency.
If an emergency call cannot be connected,
the message SYSTM BUSY appears.
Accepting an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the callers telephone number, or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appears on the display. If
the callers number is not transmitted,
CALL will appear in the display.
Press the SND key to accept call.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (receiving symbol S visible on display), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the callers telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display. If the callers number
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the display.
Press the SND key to accept the call.
Muting a call
Call waiting
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is

then no longer able to hear you.
If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.
Mute on
Press the MUT key.
Accepting a second call
Mute off
Press the SND key.

You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.
Press the MUT key.
Terminating a call
Switching between the calls
Press the END key.

The current call is terminated.
Press the SND key.
Terminating the second call
Press the END key.

The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.
199
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the drivers door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
When closing the windows, make sure there

is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
1 Left front window

2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
( page 70)
200
If the window encounters an obstruction

that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey the automatic reversal function will not operate.

SmartKey from starter switch, take it with
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
i
You can also open or close the
windows using the:
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) ( page 202).
button O in the control panel of

the climate control ( page 155) or
the automatic climate control*
( page 163)
button e in the control panel of

( page 163)
Controls in detail
Power windows
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1 or 2.
Opening the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance

point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance

point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
If you pull and hold the switch up when

closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
If the window still does not close when

there is no obstruction, then pull and
hold the switch again. The side window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function
Press switch 1 to 4 past the

resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
Warning!
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
Closing the windows
Fully opening the windows

(Express-open)
Pull switch 1 to 4 past the

resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes
completely.
Drivers door only:

If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and
release, the automatic reversal will not
function.
Stopping windows
If the upward movement of the window

is blocked during the closing
procedure, the window will stop and
open slightly.
Press or pull respective switch again.
Remove the obstruction, pull the

switch again past the resistance point
and release.
201
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
Opening (Summer opening feature)
The sliding/pop-up roof* ( page 204) will

also be opened or closed when the power
windows are operated with the SmartKey .
Warning!
Never operate the windows or

opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the
transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse
direction of movement, press button
for opening or for closing.
Aim transmitter eye at the drivers door

handle.
202
Press and hold button after

unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof*
begin to open after approximately one
second.
Release the button to stop

procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)

locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof*
begin to close after approximately one
second.

procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the

sliding/pop-up roof* are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle.
Synchronizing power windows

The power windows must be
resynchronized each time
after the battery has been

disconnected.
if the power windows cannot be fully

opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close).
Synchronizing
Switch on ignition.
Pull the power window switches until

the side windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power windows are adjusted.
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
and closed electrically. The switch for the
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead
control panel.
With the roof closed or tilted open, a

screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning!
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make

sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
1 Push up to raise roof at rear

2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur ( page 309).

SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
203
Controls in detail
i
You can also open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof using the:
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) ( page 204)
button O in the control panel of

the climate control ( page 155) or
( page 163)
button e in the control panel of

( page 163)

position 1 or 2.

roof
To open, close, raise or lower the

sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
to resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the desired position.
204
Fully opening (Express-open) and

closing (Express-close) the
sliding/pop-up roof
To open, close, raise or lower the

sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
past the resistance point in the
required direction 1 to 4 and
release.
The sliding/pop-up roof opens or
closes completely.
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
Move the switch in any direction.
i
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the roof will stop and
reopen slightly.

roof with the SmartKey
The power windows ( page 202) will also
be opened or closed when you operate the
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey .
Warning!
Never operate the windows or

opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the
transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse
direction of movement, press button
for opening or for closing.
Aim transmitter eye at the drivers door

handle.
Controls in detail
Opening (Summer opening feature)

unlocking the vehicle.
Closing (Convenience feature)
The windows and the sliding/pop-up

roof begin to open after approximately
one second.

procedure.

locking the vehicle.
The windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof begin to close after approximately
one second.

procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the

sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle.
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof

The power sliding/pop-up roof must be
resynchronized each time
after the battery has been

disconnected.
after the sliding/pop-up roof has been

closed manually.
if the sliding/pop-up roof does not

open smoothly.
after a malfunction.
Synchronizing
Switch on ignition.
Press and hold the switch in

direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up
roof is fully raised at the rear.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The sliding/pop-up roof is adjusted.
205
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages:
Cruise control, with which the vehicle

can maintain a preset speed
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP

driving systems, see Driving safety systems ( page 72).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column ( page 20).
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving

in fog.
The Resume function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
206
Controls in detail
Driving systems
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise

control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.

Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear
selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 cruise

control lever.
Step on the brake pedal.
Briefly push cruise control lever to

position 3.
Vehicles with manual transmission:

The set cruise controlled speed is
switched off when declutching exceeds
four seconds during downshifting a
gear.
or
Cruise control will be canceled. The

last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed

When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will
automatically downshift if the engines
braking power does not brake the
vehicle sufficiently.
Lift cruise control lever to position 1

and hold it up until the desired speed is
reached.
Release cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Setting a lower speed
Depress cruise control lever to

position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Release cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.
208
Fine adjustment in 1 mph

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Setting to last stored speed (Resume

function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be

set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
Faster
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the

The cruise control will resume the last

set speed.
Slower
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the

Briefly push cruise control lever to

position 4.
Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack*
Warning!
Only use roof racks approved by

Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturers installation instructions.
Mount the roof rack only to the

fastening bolts (see arrows) located
under the door weatherstrips.
Secure the roof rack according to

manufacturers instructions for
installation.
Ski sack*
!
Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
you can fully raise the

sliding/pop-up roof*.
1 Handle
2 Cover
3 Armrest
you can fully open the trunk.
Unfolding and loading
Make sure
Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2

down.
209
Controls in detail
Loading
4 Velcro strap
5 Button
Unfasten velcro strap 4.
Open trunk lid.
Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.
Press button 5.
Warning!
The flap opens downward.
The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs

of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an

accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
210
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
6 Strap
Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose

end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack
are tightly secured.
Loosen the straps.
Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
Unload skis.
Close flap in trunk.
Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
7 Hook
8 Eye
Place folded ski sack inside recess of

backrest.
Fasten velcro strap.
Close ski sack compartment cover.
Connect hook 7 to eye 8.

Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).
211
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing the ski sack
You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
or drying.
Warning!
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while

the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
Split rear bench seat*

To expand the cargo area, you can fold
down the left and right rear seat backrests.
The two sections can be folded down
separately.
Warning!
i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
accessing the trunk, always close the
flap.
1 Button
2 Ski sack frame
3 Flap
Open trunk lid.
Press button 1.
Installing the ski sack

Install the ski sack in the reverse order.
Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack

inward until the ski sack frame snaps
into place.
Close flap 3.
Close trunk lid.
The flap 3 opens downward.
Press button 1 firmly until ski sack

frame 2 is released.
Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
out.
212
When expanding the luggage area, always

fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the
backrests must remain properly locked in
the upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause
injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward
Setting up rear seat bench
The release handle 1 is located in the

trunk.
Pull release handle 1.
Fully retract and fold rearward head

restraints ( page 95).
Pull release handle 2.
Fold seat cushion 3 forward.
Fold backrest 4 forward.
Fold backrest 4 rearward until it

engages.
Fold seat cushion 3 rearward until it

locks into position.
213
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
Loading instructions
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest

up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
If the backrest is not locked into position,

a red indicator 5 will be visible.
Check for secure locking by pushing

and pulling on the backrest.
Always lock backrest in its upright position

when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is
being carried in the trunk, or the extended
cargo compartment is not in use. Check for
secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always lock
backrest in its upright position.
214
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Loading
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
i
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
The enlarged cargo area should only be
used for items which do not fit in the
trunk alone.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
215
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!
Glove box
i
Prior to closing the glove box, close the
compartment for glasses first.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
1 Glove box lid release

2 Glove box
Opening the glove box
Pull lid release 1.

The glove box lid opens downward.
Locking the glove box
Closing the glove box
Push lid up to close.
Unlocking the glove box
216
Insert mechanical key ( page 305)

into the glove box lock and turn it to
position 2.
Turn mechanical key ( page 305) in

the glove box lock to position 1.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of seat armrest
Warning!
Opening cup holder
Closing cup holder
Slide cover 1 rearward.
Push button 2.
When not in use, keep the cup holder

closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
Push in direction of arrow until cup

holder engages.
The cup holder opens automatically.
217
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear seat armrest
Warning!
Storage compartment in front of

armrest
When not in use, keep the cup holder

closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
Opening cup holder
Push front of sliding compartment 1.

The cup holder slides out.
Opening
The compartment contains a cigarette

lighter ( page 221), a coin holder and
a cup holder ( page 217).
Closing cup holder
Push sliding compartment 1 back

until it engages.
Closing
218
Slide cover 1 forward.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Armrest storage spaces
Opening telephone compartment
Vehicles with climate control:
Press button 3 on drivers or

passenger side and lift armrest.
Closing telephone compartment
Press armrest down until it engages

into place.
Changing inclination of armrest
1 Handle
2 Armrest
3 Button
Opening storage compartment
Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.
Pull up on armrest.
The storage compartment can be

heated or cooled.
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent ( page 160)
while heating the passenger compartment.
Lowering armrest
Vehicles with climate control:
Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.
Do not obstruct the air vent in the

storage compartment.
Closing storage compartment
Press armrest down until it engages

into place.
219
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning!
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Warning!
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle

standing still. Set the parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position N. With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine.
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
to vehicle occupants.
Removing ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
Briefly touch cover plate 1.

The ashtray opens automatically.
Secure vehicle from movement by

setting the parking brake. Move the
gear selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
Slide ashtray insert in direction of

arrow 2 until it disengages.
Grip ashtray at indents (arrows 3) and

remove insert from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
220
Install insert by pushing back into

frame until it engages again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear seat ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Warning!
The cigarette lighter is located in the
center console compartment in front of the
armrest.
Pull at top of cover 2 to open ashtray.
Removing ashtray insert
Never touch the heating element or sides of

the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
Opening ashtray
Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray

insert and remove it.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Install ashtray insert.
Close the ashtray.
1 Cigarette lighter
2 Cover

position 1 or 2.
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
i
The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate electrical accessories
up to a maximum 85 W.
The cigarette lighter will pop out

automatically when hot.
221
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal
injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
222
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Warning!
If you choose to use the telephone1 while

driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law,
for safety reasons, the driver should not use
the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in
motion.
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before

answering or placing a call.

covering a distance of approx. 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
You can take and place telephone calls

using the and buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
( page 138).
Observe all legal requirements.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid*
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid
system may only be performed by
completing the subscriber agreement
and placing an acquaintance call using
the SOS button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated. If the
system is not activated, the indicator
lamp in the SOS button stays on after
turning SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and the message TELE AID
EMERG. CALL NOT ACTIVATED will be
shown in the multifunction display for
approximately ten seconds.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on

Demand)
The SOS button is located above the

interior rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three

types of response:
The Roadside Assistance button

and the Information button are
located below the center armrest
cover.
automatic and manual emergency
roadside assistance and
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicles battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and
cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button and to lower,
press button .
To activate, press the SOS button, the

Roadside Assistance button or
the Information button , depending on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your Tele

Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password via first call mail. By
visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
Tele Aid (USA only), you will have access
to account information, remote door
unlock, Info Services profile and more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
223
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2, malfunctions
are detected and indicated (the indicator
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside
Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than ten
seconds or do not come on). The message
TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO
WORKSHOP! appears for approximately ten
seconds in the multifunction display.
i
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
224
Warning!
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in

the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message
TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO
WORKSHOP! is displayed in the multifunction
display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically
following an accident in which the

emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy.
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away

alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm
system ( page 78) and tow-away
alarm ( page 79).
An emergency call can also be initiated

manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS,
then briefly pressing the button located
under the cover. See ( page 226) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message
Controls in detail
Useful features
EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such
as the location of the vehicle (determined
by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color
are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. The

Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is

operational. Activation requires a
subscription for monitoring services,
connection and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response
center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
response center.
Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is

illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approximately ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
225
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
Briefly press on cover 1.

The cover will open.
Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
Wait for a voice connection to the

Response Center.
Close cover 1 after the emergency

call is concluded.
226
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the

vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicles approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button

Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button .
Press and hold button (for longer than

two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message TELE
DIAGNOSIS CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the

message TELE DIAGNOSIS
CALL CONNECTED appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established, the audio
Controls in detail
Useful features
system mutes and the message TELE AID
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display.
Describe the nature of the need for

assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such

as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This

function permits the Mercedes-Benz
Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and
actual vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately ten seconds during the system self-check after
turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2 (together with the
SOS button and the Information
button ).
See system self-check ( page 224)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message TELE DIAGNOSIS CALL
FAILED appears in the multifunction
display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be

terminated using the button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Information button
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button .
Press and hold button (for longer than

two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO CONNECTING CALL will
When the connection is established, the

message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
227
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display.
Information regarding the operation of
your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you
separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp on the Information
button remains illuminated in red
for approximately ten seconds during
the system self-check after turning the
position 2 (together with the SOS
button and the Roadside Assistance
button ).
228
See system self-check ( page 224)

when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message INFO
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated
using the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently
active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018
(in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada) as soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade signals
The Tele Aid system processes calls using

the following priority:
If the indicator lamp continues to flash

or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
in Canada.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,

the audio system or the COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the
call. The COMAND* navigation system
(if engaged) will continue to run. The
display in the instrument cluster is
available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit.
A pop-up window will appear in the
COMAND* display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
Automatic emergency First priority
Manual emergency Second priority
Roadside assistance Third priority
Information Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated

while you are connected, an upgrade
(alternating) tone will be heard, and the
appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to
retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is
concluded, a beep will be heard and the
respective indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND* system operation will
resume.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by
a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel.
229
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
The Response Center will then unlock your

vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response

Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the

message EMERGENCY CALL
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the
multifunction display to indicate
receipt of the door unlock command.
Then return to your vehicle and pull the

trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
230
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a

Response Center specialist will
attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must
wait 15 minutes before pulling the
trunk recessed handle again.
Stolen vehicle tracking services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
Pass this number on to the

Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicles
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicles location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
Warning!
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink or some other systems.
Before programming the integrated remote

control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
You can program the signal transmitter

buttons.
Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button

5
Hand-held transmitter button
Hand-held remote control

transmitter (not part of the
vehicle equipment)
When programming a garage door opener,

the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
231
Controls in detail
Useful features
Certain types of garage door openers

are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience
difficulties with programming the
transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
For operation in the USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
232
Programming or reprogramming the

integrated remote control
Step 1:
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
If you have previously programmed an

integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator light
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3:
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first

time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after
20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly

for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the rolling code
feature.
Hold the end of the hand-held remote

control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control
located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
Using both hands, simultaneously

press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 1 on the
integrated remote control will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly.
Step 5:
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes

rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
Step 7:
To program the remaining two buttons,

repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Press and hold the just-trained

and observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the integrated signal transmitter
button is pressed and released.
233
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
Step 9:
Step 12:
To train a garage door opener (or other

rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the Programming portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
The training light is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following step.
Step 10:
Locate training button on the garage

door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
training button may also be referred
to as learnor smart button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operators manual.
234
Press training button on the garage

door opener motor head unit.
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and

release the programmed integrated
or 4).
Step 11:
Press, hold for two seconds and

release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling

code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Confirm the garage door operation by

pressing the programmed integrated
or 4).
Step 13:
To program the remaining two buttons,

repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Step 4:
Operation of integrated remote control
Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
Switch on ignition.
Select and press the appropriate

(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
If you live in Canada or if you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the

(2, 3 or 4) while you press and
re-press (cycle) your hand-held
remote control transmitter 6 every
two seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. Upon successful
training, the indicator lamp 1 will
flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as

long as the button is pressed up to
20 seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and

step 6 to complete.
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
Reprogramming a single integrated

signal transmitter button
Switch on ignition.
Simultaneously hold down the signal

transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for
approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow

these steps:
The codes of all three channels are

erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
236
Press and hold the desired signal

transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
The indicator lamp will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the integrated signal transmitter
button, proceed with programming
starting with step 3.
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
237
Operation
In the Operation section you will find
detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle

during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
Drive your vehicle during the first

1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads

(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
Shift gears in a timely manner.
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle

down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when

driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may

gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
238
!
Additional instructions for AMG
vehicles:
During the first 1000 miles

(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
During this period, avoid engine

speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply

to your vehicle type, also apply when
driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
after the engine or the rear differential has
been replaced
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Drive sensibly save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
Remove unnecessary loads.
Remove roof rack when not in use.
Allow engine to warm up under low

load use.
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed

at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact your authorized
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs

and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
Keep drivers foot area clear at all times.

Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!

systems. In this case, it is important to keep
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by

driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly country.
239
Operation
Brakes
Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time

without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only
subject to moderate loads, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will

cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,

thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Refer to the description of the Brake

Assist System (BAS) ( page 73).
240
Be very careful not to endanger other

road users when you apply the brakes.
If the parking brake is released and the

brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may

be the reason for low brake fluid in the
reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact your authorized
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact your authorized
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are

installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Operation
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engines braking power. This helps
prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do

not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
!
Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the
brake reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain
wear.
Parking
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).
When parking on hills, always turn front
Warning!

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to

position P (manual transmission: first or
reverse gear).
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front


position 0 and remove.
Take the SmartKey with you and lock

vehicle when leaving.
241
Operation
Tires
Warning!
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or

ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for
repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by

law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
242
Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor

vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the tread wear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects

the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Operation
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction

will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
considerably greater than when the road is

not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
!
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the drive
train which is not covered by the
Tire speed rating
Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate

a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local

speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated

radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
243
Operation
C 240, C 240 4MATIC, C 320, and
C 320 4MATIC
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
H-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
C 230 Kompressor Sport, and
C 320 Sport
W-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h) or with Y-rated
tires, which have a speed rating of
186 mph (300 km/h).
130 mph (210 km/h).
C 32 AMG
Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
155 mph (250 km/h).
i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see Winter tires
( page 263).
Winter driving instructions

The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N or in
case of manual transmission declutch.
Try to keep the vehicle under control by
corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see Snow chains
( page 264).
Warning!

result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of control loss.
244
Operation
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking
efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road

users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make

sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind
Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice.
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the
For more information, see Winter driving

( page 263).
245
Operation
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Warning!
Warning!
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Please do not forget that your primary

responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
Management and Data System), radio or
telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry

objects.

covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every
second.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Always fasten items being carried as

securely as possible.
246
Telephones* and two-way radios

transmitters
Observe all legal requirements

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicles electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable

telephone or a citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Operation
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or

operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications. Any
adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Service Booklet.
247
Operation
Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to

your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
248
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to
approximately 248F (120C).
the coolant temperature over 248F
(120C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Driving when your engine is badly

overheated can cause some fluids,
which may have leaked into the engine
compartment, to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can

cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact,
extinguish all smoking materials. Never
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials
near gasoline!
Flexible Fuel Vehicles only (identified by a

label reading Premium gasoline or E85
only! on fuel filler flap):
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly
flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
or if you come into contact with it or inhale
fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol
fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extinguish all open flames before fueling. Never
smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.
The fuel filler flap is located on the

right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
the fuel filler flap.
Turn the engine off by turning the

SmartKey to position 0.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
249
Operation
At the gas station
Open fuel filler flap by pushing at the

point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Turn fuel cap to the left and hold on to

it until possible pressure is released.
Take off cap and set it in the recess on

fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Warning!
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create

pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle

unit cuts out do not top up or overfill.
Replace fuel cap by turning it to the

right.
You will hear when fuel cap is
tightened.
Close fuel filler flap.
i
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by
a label reading Premium gasoline or
E85 only! on fuel filler flap.
For more information, see Flexible
Fuel Vehicles ( page 354).
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? malfunction indicator lamp to illuminate.
For more information, see Practical
hints ( page 276).
250
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
1 Coolant level
For more information on coolant, see
Coolant level ( page 257).
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
Removing fuse box cover
( page 333).
Engine oil level
If you find that the brake fluid in the

brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see Practical
hints ( page 275).
For more information on engine oil level,

see Engine oil ( page 253).
Opening hood ( page 252).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
Replacing bulbs ( page 310).
Exterior lamp switch ( page 102).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
( page 261).
3 Windshield washer and headlamp

cleaning system*
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see Windshield
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system* ( page 259).
251
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
!
To avoid damage to the windshield
wipers or hood, never open the hood if
the wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Do not pull the release lever while the

vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
Opening
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of

moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning!
2 Handle for opening the hood
1 Hood release
Pull lever 1 downwards.

The hood is unlocked and handle 2
will extend out of the radiator grille.
252
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of

radiator grille.
Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on

the handle) and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
The engine is equipped with a transistorized

ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is on and the engine is

turned manually
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
Be careful that you do not close the hood on

anyone.
The amount of oil your engine needs will

depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of

approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
the vehicle is driven frequently at

higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only

be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure the hood is fully

closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
253
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the
control system
i
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
When checking the oil level the vehicle

must
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
have been stationary for at least five

minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the

multifunction display, do the following:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

OK
ADD 1.0 Qt. TO

REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!

to position 2.
The standard display ( page 113) should

One of the following messages will

subsequently appear in the indicator:
Press button k or j on the

steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MEASURING NOW
MEASURE. CORRECT
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
254
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
ADD 1.5 Qts. TO

(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
ADD 2.0 Qts. TO

(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see ( page 255).

More information on engine oil can be
found in the Technical data section
( page 349) and ( page 352).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH ON IGNITION!
Switch on the ignition.
Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message:
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
If engine is at normal operating

temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If engine is not yet at normal operating

temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If you see the message:

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
If the engine is at normal operating

temperature, wait five minutes before
checking oil.
If the engine is not yet at normal

operating temperature, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine

at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
Have excess oil siphoned or drained

off. Contact your authorized
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
More information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil can be found
in the Practical hints section
( page 291).
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification
(e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is
printed on the oil filler cap, only use an
engine oil from the list of approved
engine oils in the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet that meets
the specification indicated on the oil
filler cap. Using engine oils of other
specification may cause the FSS to
incorrectly determine the next service
interval and will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
255
Operation
Engine compartment
!
Warranty.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
!
Warranty.
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
1 Filler cap
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful

not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
More information on engine oil can be

found in the Technical data section
( page 349) and ( page 352).
Transmission fluid level
C 240, and C 320 (all models), C 32 AMG
1 Filler cap
256
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful

not to overfill with oil.
The transmission fluid level does not need

to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water

and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap

approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.
Using a rag, turn cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to
release any excess pressure.
Continue turning the cap to the left and

remove it.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine

parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
The coolant level is correct if the level
for cold coolant: reaches the black

top part of the reservoir
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
Replace and tighten cap.
Use extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
For more information on coolant, see

Coolants ( page 356).
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant

reservoir if engine temperature is
above 194F (90C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
Warning!
1 Coolant expansion tank
257
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicles battery is located in the
engine compartment ( page 323).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated
service life. Refer to Service Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
258
all safety instructions

G Observe
E Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
Keep children away.
Risk of explosion
C
A
Follow the instructions in this
Keep flames or sparks away
F
Operator's Manual.
D
from battery. Do not smoke.
acid is caustic. Do not

B Battery
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately

flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Batteries contain materials that can harm

the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate S to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
1 Washer fluid reservoir

Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of:
3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without

6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with

Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze

on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
For more information, see Windshield

washer and headlamp cleaning* system
( page 358).
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
the headlamps.
259
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension

components can be damaged.
The correct operating clearance of the

wheels and the tires are no longer
guaranteed.
260
Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the

tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous

damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the
vehicle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation.
Important guidelines
Only use sets of tires and rims of the

same type and make.
Tires must be of the correct size for the

rim.
Break in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Regularly check the tires and rims for

damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire pressure loss and damage to
the tire beads.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire

pressure and correct as required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down

too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you

should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon

varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the

intended direction of tire rotation.
Warning!
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the

specified tire inflation pressures for warm
and cold tires as well as for various
operating conditions.
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after

six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
If the tires are warm you should only

correct the tire pressure if it is too low for
current operating conditions.
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
Check the tires for punctures from

foreign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking from

the valves or from around the rim.
Increased inflation pressures listed for

heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires

are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at
intervals of no more than 14 days.
261
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approx. 1.5 psi
(0.1 bar) per 18F (10C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when
checking tire pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires

wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the drivers
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Rotating wheels
Warning!
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are

of the same size.
Follow recommended inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes, etc.
262
On vehicles with the same wheel size all

around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the
degree of tire wear. The same direction of
tire rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and
ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after

changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze

concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the

water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
S to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
( page 358).
Battery test. Battery capacity drops

with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started, even at
low ambient temperatures.
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a

minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45F (7C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC
in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Warning!
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in

(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the

winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available from your tire
dealer or from any authorized
Warning!
If you use your spare tire when winter tires

are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
263
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only)
Snow chains
The engine is equipped with a block

heater.
Snow chains should only be driven on

snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
The electrical cable may be installed at

i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
( page 74) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicles traction.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
264
Use of snow chains is not permissible

with all wheel/tire combinations.
Snow chains should only be used on

the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
Only use snow chains that are

approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited

depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive
use snow chains on rear tires only.
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes:
225/45 R17 91H M+S
225/45 R17 91W
245/40 R17 91W
245/40 R17 91Y
245/40 ZR17 91Y
T 125/90 R16 98M
T 125/80 R17 99M
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following
messages will appear in the multifunction
display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
SERVICE A IN XX DAYS
SERVICE A IN XX MILES (KM)
SERVICE A DUE NOW!
Clearing the service indicator

The service indicator is automatically
cleared
The type of service due is indicated in the

multifunction display:
9
Minor service (A)
Major service (B)
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
after ten seconds when you switch on

the ignition or when reaching the
service threshold while driving
after 30 seconds, once the suggested

service term has passed
You can also clear it yourself.
Press the reset button on the

instrument cluster ( page 22).
Service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested
service term, you will see the following
message in the multifunction display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX MI (KM)
An acoustic signal will also sound.
265
Operation
Maintenance
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Calling up the service indicator
Switch on ignition.
Resetting the service indicator

In the event that the service on your
vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
The standard display of the control

system appears ( page 113).
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS

indicator appears in the multifunction
display.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service
deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the
service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
266
Switch on ignition.
The standard display of the control
system appears ( page 113).
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS

indicator appears in the multifunction
display.
Press reset button for about three

seconds.
This message appears in the multifunction display:
SERVICE INTERVAL?
RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC.
To confirm, press reset button until you

hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the service indicator was
inadvertently reset, have a
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next
service interval which will result in
engine damage not covered by the
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicles
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your

vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by

extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
More frequent washings are necessary to

deal with unfavorable conditions:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust

emissions)
Tar
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to

time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
Air pollution
Road salt
To avoid paint damage, you should

immediately remove:
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant
Brake fluid
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of

the above adverse influences.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody

of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
267
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
how-to information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet Vehicle Care Guide.
268
Power washer
Tar stains
When using a power washer for cleaning

the vehicle, always observe the manufacturers operating instructions.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry

and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Paintwork, painted body components

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not bead up, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones,
vehicle doors, etc.).
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Vehicle washing
Ornamental moldings
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,

make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle

in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo.
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty

chrome-plated parts, use a chrome
cleaner.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the

engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be
lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys
should be protected from any wax.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,

turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces

of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
269
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
Window cleaning
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care

should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and

remove SmartKey from starter switch
before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise
the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a

clean cloth and detergent solution.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
270
Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and

remove SmartKey from starter switch
before cleaning the windshield, otherwise
the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
using a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water.
Follow the instructions on container.
i
Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.

Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
Instrument cluster
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or

mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Operation
Vehicle care
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Headliner and rear window shelf
Upholstery
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly

or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a

dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Cup holder
Seat belts
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or

mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
The webbing must not be treated with

chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176F
(80C) or in direct sunlight.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing

clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Hard plastic trim items

Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Leather upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should
not become wet.
271
Operation
Vehicle care
Cloth upholstery
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
272
Practical hints
What to do if
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
273
Practical hints
What to do if
What to do if
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
come on during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch

to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has

switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
switched off (see messages in display).
Continue driving with added caution.

Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally

but without the ABS available.
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon

as possible.
The yellow ABS malfunction

indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
Failure to follow these instructions

increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below ten

volts. The ABS has switched off.
274
Read and observe messages in the

display ( page 280).
When the voltage is above this value

again, the ABS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator

(alternator) and battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if
Problem
3
;
(Canada only) The red brake warning lamp

comes on while driving and
(USA only)
you hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Dont add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
You are driving with the

parking brake set.
Release the parking brake

( page 45).
There is insufficient brake fluid

in the reservoir.
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the

vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
!
thickness and leaks.
275
Practical hints
What to do if
Problem
The yellow CHECK ENGINE

malfunction indicator lamp
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in:
Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible by an authorized
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the
parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tight.
Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty.
After refuelling start the engine three

or four times in succession.
The fuel management system
The ignition system
The emission control system
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive

emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do

not need to have your vehicle checked.
276
Practical hints
What to do if
Problem
The yellow ESP warning lamp

Possible cause
Suggested solution
The ESP is deactivated.
Risk of accident!
If the ESP cannot be switched back on,

have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road, weather and traffic
conditions.
The yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP or traction control has come into

operation because of detected traction loss
in at least one tire.
Switch the ESP back on ( page 74).
When driving off, apply as little

throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the

accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road and weather
conditions.
Do not deactivate the ESP.

Exceptions: ( page 74).

277
Practical hints
What to do if
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp comes The fuel level has gone below the reserve
on while driving.
mark.
Refuel at the next gas station

( page 249).
<
The red seat belt non-usage warning The warning lamp reminds you to fasten
lamp illuminates for a brief period
seat belts.
after starting the engine.
Fasten your seat belt.
The red SRS indicator lamp comes on There is a malfunction in the restraint syswhile driving.
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
or fail to activate in an accident.
Drive with added caution to the

nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is

indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
278
Practical hints
What to do if
Lamp in center console
Problem
PASS. AIRBAG OFF
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TM1
The indicator lamp comes on. A BabySmart

child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is
switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when
there is no BabySmartTM child seat
installed on the front passenger seat.
The indicator lamp does not The system is malfunctioning.
come on with a BabySmartTM
child seat properly installed
on the front passenger seat.
Have the system checked as soon

as possible by an authorized
Make sure there is nothing

between seat cushion and child
seat and check installation of the
child seat.
If the lamp remains out, have the

system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Do not use the BabySmartTM
restraint to transport children on
the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
279
Practical hints
What to do if
Messages in the display
Warning!
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operators Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system ( page 122) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button ( page 22) and are
then stored in the malfunction message
memory ( page 122).
280
All categories of messages contain

important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the

instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
i
Turning the SmartKey in starter switch
to position 2, causes all lamps as well
as the multifunction display to come
on. Ensure that they are all in working
order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the display. High priority
messages appear on a red background.
Practical hints
What to do if
Text messages
Display message
BAS
BRAKE ASSIST
NOT AVAILABLE!
BRAKE ASSIST
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution

volts. The BAS has switched off.

again, the BAS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator and

battery checked.
Have the system checked at an

soon as possible.
The BAS has detected a malfunction and

switched off. The brake system is still
functioning normally but without the BAS
available.

DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS or the BAS display is

malfunctioning.

soon as possible.

281
Practical hints
What to do if
Display message
ESP
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The ESP was deactivated because of a

malfunction or interrupted power supply.
The ABS might not be operational.
Synchronize the ESP. With vehicle

stationary and the engine running, turn
the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right to synchronize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.

The self-diagnosis has not been
completed.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go
without the wheels hitting any objects,
e.g. a road curb.
282
The display will clear after driving a short

distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Practical hints
What to do if
Display message
ESP
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!
ESP
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution

volts. The ESP has switched off.

again, the ESP is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator and

battery checked.

The ESP is deactivated because of a

malfunction.

DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP or the ESP display is

malfunctioning.


283
Practical hints
What to do if
Symbol messages
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS has detected a malfunction and

has switched off. The ESP and the BAS
are also deactivated.

The brake system is still functioning

normally but without the ABS available.

soon as possible.

DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS or the ABS display is

malfunctioning.


soon as possible.

284
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The battery was charged with a battery

charger or jump started.
Have the battery checked at a service

station.
The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Stop immediately and check the

poly-V-belt.
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
broken poly-V-belt
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise

the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
UNDERVOLTAGE
ENGINE ON!
The battery has insufficient voltage and

can no longer supply the convenience
functions such as seat heater*.
UNDERVOLTAGE
The battery is malfunctioning.
SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF!
Drive immediately to the nearest

Start the engine ( page 43).
Have the battery checked at a service

station.
285
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
! (Canada only)
; (USA only)
2
3
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
PARK. BRAKE
RELEASE BRAKE!
You are driving with the parking brake

set.
Release the parking brake

( page 45).
BRAKE WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their wear

limit.
Have the brake pads replaced as soon

as possible.
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the

reservoir.
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and

notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Driving with this message displayed can

result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
286

thickness and leaks.
Brake pad thickness must be visually

checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service
booklet.
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
The coolant level is too low.
Add coolant ( page 257).
If you have to add coolant frequently,

have the cooling system checked by
Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major
engine damage.
287
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The coolant is too hot.
Stop the vehicle and turn off the

engine.
Only start the engine again after the

message disappears. You could
otherwise damage the engine.
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
288
During severe operating conditions and

stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248F (120C).
!
the coolant temperature above 248F
(120C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
Stop immediately and check the

poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise

the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The cooling fan for the coolant is

malfunctioning.
Do not continue to drive the vehicle

with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Observe the coolant temperature

display.
Have the fan replaced as soon as

possible.
289
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
CRUISE CONTROL
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
Cruise control is malfunctioning.

Center.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
The instrument cluster display is

malfunctioning.

The displays for several systems have

malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.
Have the electronic systems checked

by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Certain electronic systems are unable to

relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
Have the electronic systems checked

Center ( page 276).
Close the doors.
290
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
DOOR OPEN!
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display
You are attempting to drive with one or

more doors open.
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Suggested solution
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
Add engine oil ( page 255) and check

the engine oil level ( page 254).
There is no oil in the engine. There is a

danger of engine damage.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as

soon as possible.
Add engine oil ( page 255) and check

the engine oil level ( page 254).
ADD 1.0 Qt. ENGINE OIL

WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
Canada only:
ADD 1.0 LITER ENG. OIL
WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

REDUCE OIL LEVEL
You have added too much engine oil.

There is a risk of damaging the engine or
the catalytic converter.
Have oil siphoned or drained off.

Observe all legal requirements with
respect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
It may be that there is water in the engine

oil.
Have the engine oil checked.
291
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Suggested solution
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical

level.
Check the engine oil level

( page 254) and add oil as required
( page 255).
If you must add engine oil frequently,

have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
Have the measuring system checked

Center.
ENGINE OIL SENSOR

VISIT WORKSHOP!
When the message ADD 1.0 Qt. ENGINE

OIL WHEN NEXT REFUELING! (Canada:
1.0 LITER) appears while the engine is
running and at operating temperature, the
engine oil level has dropped to
approximately the minimum level.
292
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
When this occurs, the warning will first

come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should
be topped to the required level with an
approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
RESERVE FUEL
GO TO GAS STATION!
The fuel level has dropped below the

reserve mark.
Refuel at the next gas station

( page 249).
CHECK GAS CAP!

SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
Check the fuel cap ( page 249).
HOOD OPEN!
You are driving with the hood open.
Close the hood ( page 252).
REMOVE KEY!
You have forgotten to remove the

SmartKey.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.
REPLACE KEY!
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
No additional code available for

SmartKey.
Change the SmartKey.
3RD BRAKE LIGHT

CHECK LIGHT!
The high mounted brake lamp is

malfunctioning.

AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
SmartKey in starter switch position 1

or 2.
Remove SmartKey from the starter

switch.
BRAKE LIGHT
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or

lamp is permanently on.

BRAKE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.

BRAKE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The display for the lamps or the system is

malfunctioning.

Y
I
293
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
294
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
FRONT FOGLIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
REAR FOGLIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left high beam lamp is

malfunctioning.
HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right high beam lamp is

malfunctioning.
LIGHT SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The

headlamps switch on automatically.
In the control system, set lamp

operation to manual ( page 123).
Switch on headlamps using the

exterior lamp switch.

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, L

CHECK LIGHT!
The left license plate lamp is

malfunctioning.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, R

CHECK LIGHT!
The right license plate lamp is

malfunctioning.
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
LIGHTS
TURN OFF LIGHTS!
This display appears if the drivers door is

opened and no SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
Switch off the headlights.
LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right low beam lamp is

malfunctioning.

REVERSE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
REVERSE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
MARKER LIGHT, FL
CHECK LIGHTS!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left parking lamps are

malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being
used.

MARKER LIGHT, FR
CHECK LIGHTS!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right parking lamps are

malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being
used.

TAIL LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHTS!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning.

A backup bulb is being used.

295
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
296
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
TAIL LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHTS!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning.

A backup bulb is being used.

TURN SIG., LF
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front turn signal lamp is

malfunctioning.
TURN SIG., RF
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front turn signal lamp is

malfunctioning.
TURN SIG., LR
CHECK LIGHT!
The left rear turn signal lamp is

malfunctioning.
TURN SIG., RR
CHECK LIGHT!
The right rear turn signal lamp is

malfunctioning.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L

CHECK LIGHT!
The left turn signal in the side mirror is

malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as

possible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, R

CHECK LIGHT!
The right turn signal in the side mirror is

malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as

possible.
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
<
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
DRIVERS SEAT BELT

FASTEN SEAT BELT!
The display reminds you and your

passengers to fasten seat belts.
Fasten the seat belts.
FR. PASS. SEAT BELT

FASTEN SEAT BELT!
The display reminds you and your

passengers to fasten seat belts.
Fasten the seat belts.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM

DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.

RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
The system is malfunctioning.
Drive with added caution to the

nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an

accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
297
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
STEERING WHEEL ADJ.

LOCK!
The steering column is not properly

locked.
Lock steering column ( page 37).
STEERING OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The steering gear oil level is too low.

There is a danger of steering gear
damage.
Have the system checked by an

If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is

too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
298
Practical hints
What to do if
Display symbol
K
J
L
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
CLOSE
SUNROOF!
You have opened the drivers door with

the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
Close the sliding/pop-up roof

( page 203).
CLOSE
SUNROOF!
You have opened the drivers door with

the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
Close the sliding/pop-up roof

( page 203).
TELE AID
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
One or more main functions of the Tele

Aid system* are malfunctioning.
Have the Tele Aid system* checked by

FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE!
This display appears if button

wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not
equipped with a telephone*.
TRUNK OPEN!
This message will appear whenever the

trunk lid is open.
Close the trunk lid.
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
The fluid level has dropped to

about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.
Add washer fluid ( page 259).
299
Practical hints
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on

the left side secured by a velcro strap.
The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage

compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Removing the vehicle tool kit
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage

trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
The following is included:
Towing eye bolt
Wheel wrench
Alignment bolt
Vehicle jack
Wheel bolts
Special fuse extractor
Spare fuses
Unfasten velcro strap.
Remove first aid kit.
1 Retaining screw
2 Storage well casing
Check expiration dates and contents

for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
Loosen retaining screw 1 in the

middle of storage well casing 2.
Remove storage well casing 2.
300
Practical hints
Remove vehicle tool kit 6.
Storing the vehicle tool kit
Place vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool

kit storage well casing 5.
Place storage well casing 2 over the
vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5
and turn retaining screw 1 clockwise
as far it will go to secure the Minispare
wheel.
i
3 Arrow
4 Minispare wheel
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
6 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Vehicle jack
Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage

well casing 5 must point in the direction of travel. Otherwise you cannot
place the storage well casing 2 on top
and secure the Minispare wheel with
retaining screw 1.
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk lid.
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
301
Practical hints
The vehicle jack is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor
together with the vehicle tool kit in the
vehicle tool kit storage well casing.
Minispare wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the
storage compartment underneath the
trunk floor.
Removing the Minispare wheel
Operational position
Storage position
Remove vehicle jack from its

compartment.
Push crank handle up.
302
Turn crank handle clockwise until it

engages (operational position).
Before storing the vehicle jack in its

compartment:
It should be fully collapsed.
The handle must be folded in (storage

position).
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage

trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
Loosen the retaining screw

( page 300) in the middle of storage
well casing.
Remove the storage well casing

( page 300).
Practical hints
Storing the Minispare wheel
Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel

well.
Place vehicle tool kit storage well

casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
To prevent damage, always disengage

trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk lid.
Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit

storage well casing 4 points in the direction of travel.
1 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Vehicle jack
2 Arrow
3 Minispare wheel
4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well

casing 4.
Remove Minispare wheel 3.
Place storage well casing ( page 300)

over vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 and turn the retaining screw
( page 300) clockwise as far it will go
to secure the Minispare wheel.
i
Arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 4 must point in the
direction of travel. Otherwise you
cannot place the storage well casing
( page 300) on top and secure the
Minispare wheel with the retaining
screw ( page 300).
Warning!
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are

different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The Minispare wheel should only be used
temporarily, and should be replaced with a
regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
303
Practical hints
In the case of a flat tire, you may
temporarily use the Minispare wheel when
observing the following restrictions:
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility

to have the flat tire repaired or
replaced as appropriate.
Do not operate vehicle with more than

one Minispare wheel mounted.
For more information, see Rims and Tires

( page 342).
304
Minispare wheel bolts
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel or other
steel rims. The use of any wheel bolts
other than wheel bolts 2 for the
Minispare wheel or other steel rims will
physically damage the vehicles
brakes.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims

2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other
steel rims (located in trunk with spare
wheel)
Warning!
Make sure to use the original length wheel

bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the drivers door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey, open the drivers door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
The passenger door cannot be unlocked
manually.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the
mechanical key will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system.
following:

SmartKey.

switch.
1 Mechanical key locking tab

2 Mechanical key
Move locking tab 1 in direction of

arrow and slide mechanical key 2 out
of the housing.
1 Unlocked
2 Locked
Unlock the door with the mechanical

key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left 1.
305
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk

The lock is located next to the recessed
handle.
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise completely to position 1 and

hold it in this position.
Pull trunk lid handle 2 and lift the
trunk lid.
!
Always make sure there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
Slide mechanical key out of the

Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
306
Locking the vehicle

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
Close the passenger doors and the

trunk.
Press the central locking switch in the

cockpit ( page 91).
Check to see whether the locking

knobs on the passenger doors are
down. If necessary push them down
manually.
Slide mechanical key out of the

Lock the drivers door with the

mechanical key ( page 305).
Check if the trunk is locked. If

necessary lock the trunk with the
mechanical key ( page 89).
Practical hints
Changing batteries in the SmartKey

If the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an
Warning!
Insert mechanical key 1 in side

opening and push grey slide.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the

SmartKey housing in direction of
arrow.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.

Recycling of batteries is the preferred
for recycling.
i
When changing batteries, always
replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Remove mechanical key 1

( page 305).
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
Remove the batteries.
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new

batteries under contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
Return battery compartment 2 into

housing until it locks into place.
307
Practical hints
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the

SmartKey.
Reach inside through opening 2 in

direction of arrow.
Open the storage compartment in front

of the center armrest ( page 218).
Turn release knob 1 clockwise

(arrow).
Release coin holder 1 (e.g. using a

small coin).
The fuel filler flap can now be opened.
Swing coin holder 1 aside.
Insert a tool 2 (e.g. flat blade

screwdriver) into the opening.
Perform the following two steps

simultaneously:
When inserting the batteries, make

sure they are clean and free of lint.
Fuel filler flap
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
Manually unlocking the transmission

gear selector lever
In the case of power failure the transmission gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
Push tool 2 down.
Move gear selector lever from

position P.
Reinstall coin holder 1 after removing

tool 2 from the opening.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
Open the trunk lid.
Fold away right-side tail lamp trim.
308
1 Coin holder
2 Tool
Practical hints
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical
malfunction occur.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located
behind the lens 1 of the interior overhead
light.
Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction

of arrow.
Lower rear of cover and remove.
Remove cover.
Obtain crank 3.
Insert crank 3 through hole.
Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
Pry of lens 1 using a flat blade

screwdriver.
Do not disconnect electrical

connectors.
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof must be

resynchronized after being operated
manually ( page 205).
309
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
i
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
Standing lamps
Tail lamps
Rear fog lamp
310
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
1 Additional turn signal
lamps
2 Turn signal lamp
Halogen
Turn signal lamp
Bi-Xenon*
Type
LED
1156 A
2357 A
3 Halogen headlamps:
H7 (55 W)
Low beam
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
D2S-35 W
Low and high beam
4 Halogen headlamps:
H7 (55 W)
High beam
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
H7 (55 W)
High beam flasher
Parking and standing
lamps
W5W
5 Fog lamp
HB4/9006
(55 W)
6 Side marker lamp
W5W
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
Notes on bulb replacement

Type
7 High mounted brake LED

lamp
8 Brake lamp
P 21 W
9 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
a Backup lamp
P 21 W
b Tail, parking,
standing and side
marker lamp
P 21/5 W
c License plate lamps C 5 W

d Rear fog lamp,
drivers side
P 21/4 W
Warning!
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
A bulb can explode if you
touch or move it when hot
drop the bulb
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
12 volt bulbs of the same type and

with the specified watt rating.
Switch lights off before changing a bulb

to prevent short circuits.
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of oil

and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not

come on, visit an authorized
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the

following lamps replaced by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Additional turn signals in the

exterior rear view mirrors
High mounted brake lamp
Xenon lamps
Front fog lamps
311
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Insert the new bulb so that the base

locates in the recess on the holder.
Halogen headlamps
Clip the retainer springs and plug the

connector onto the bulb.
Align headlamp cover 2 or 3 and

click into place.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

2 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp, parking and standing lamp
3 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp
312
4 Low beam headlamp bulb

5 High beam headlamp bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
Low and high beam bulb
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood ( page 252).
Press the clamp and remove headlamp

cover 2 or 3.
Pull electrical connector off.
Unclip the retainer springs and take out

the bulb.
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise

and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and

twist clockwise.
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist

clockwise.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Bi-Xenon* headlamps
Warning!

cover 2.
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Do not remove the cover 3 for the

Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage
in Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace
the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such
work done by a qualified technician.
Reinstall bulb socket.
Align headlamp cover 2 and click into

place.
4 High beam flasher bulb

5 Bayonet socket for high beam flasher
bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
High beam bulb
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

2 Headlamp cover for high beam flasher,
parking and standing lamp
3 Cover for Bi-Xenon lamp
Press the clamp and remove lamp

cover 2.
Pull electrical connector 4 off.
313
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Twist bayonet socket 5 counterclockwise to the stop (do not remove).
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and

twist clockwise.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Insert the new bulb so that the base

locates in the recess in bayonet
socket 5.
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist

clockwise.
Twist bayonet socket clockwise until

you hear it snap into place.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Plug the connector onto the bulb.
Align lamp cover 2 and click into

place.

cover 2.
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Align headlamp cover 2 and click into

place.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise

and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
314
Side marker lamp bulb
Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
Remove front end first.
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out.
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
Insert new bulb in socket.
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist

clockwise.
To reinstall lamp, set rear end in

bumper and let front end snap into
place.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
License plate lamp
Tail lamp assemblies
Switch off lights.
Open trunk lid.
1 Locking lever
Fold trim to the side.
Turn locking lever 1 to vertical

position and remove bulb carrier.
2 Rear fog lamp, drivers side

3 Back up lamp
4 Stop lamp
5 Turn signal lamp
6 Tail, parking, standing and side marker
lamp
Loosen both screws 1 and remove

lamp.
Gently push bulb into socket, turn

counterclockwise and pull out.
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall

lamp.
Insert new bulb and turn clockwise.
Retighten the screws.
Reinstall bulb holder and close trim

panel.
1 Screw
315
Practical hints
Removing wiper blades
Warning!
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from

starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Fold the wiper arm forward.
Installing wiper blades
Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on

the wiper arm.
Never open the hood when the wiper

arms are folded forward.
Slide the tab back in the direction of

arrow 1 until it audibly engages.
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on

the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Pull the tab in direction of arrow 2 and

remove windshield wiper.
316
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Park the vehicle as far as possible from

moving traffic on a hard surface.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Engage the steering wheel lock in the

straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
Move the gear selector lever to P

(manual transmission to first or reverse
gear).
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Warning!
Preparing the vehicle
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are

different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
Prepare the vehicle as described on

( page 317).
Take the wheel wrench and the jack

out of the vehicle tool kit storage well
casing underneath the trunk floor
( page 300).
Take the Minispare wheel and wheel

bolts out of the storage compartment
underneath the trunk floor
( page 302).
The spare wheel should only be used

temporarily, and replaced with a regular
road wheel as quick as possible.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at

a safe distance from the roadway.
Lifting the vehicle

In the case of a flat tire, you may
temporarily use the Minispare wheel when
observing the following restrictions:
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility

to have the flat tire repaired or
replaced as appropriate.
Do not operate vehicle with more than

one spare wheel mounted.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away

by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
Place one chock in front of and one
behind the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
Place chocks on the downhill side

blocking both wheels of the other axle.
317
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
318
Wheel cover on vehicles with steel rims

(Canada only)
On wheel to be changed, remove wheel

cover by reaching into two openings of
the wheel cover and pulling away from
the wheel.
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do

not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with
wrench).
Practical hints
Flat tire
The jack take-up brackets are located
directly behind the front wheel housings
and in front of the rear wheel housings.
Removing the wheel
1 Jack
2 Take-up bracket
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a

maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.
Place jack 1 on firm ground.
Warning!
Position jack 1 under take-up

bracket 2 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
The jack is intended only for lifting the

vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
Never start the engine when the vehicle

is raised.
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
1 Alignment bolt
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and

remove.
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment

bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolts
and wheel hub threads.
Remove the wheel.
319
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the new wheel
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and

wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
Warning!
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel or other
steel rims (located in trunk with spare
wheel)
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel or other
steel rims. The use of any wheel bolts
other than wheel bolts 2 for the
Minispare wheel or other steel rims will
physically damage the vehicles
brakes.
320
Always replace wheel bolts that are

damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct mounting
bolts.
Guide Minispare wheel onto the

alignment bolt and push it on.
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them

slightly.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
Lower vehicle by turning crank

counterclockwise until vehicle is
resting fully on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
Have the tightening torque checked after

changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Store the jack and the other vehicle

tools in the vehicle tool kit storage well
casing ( page 303).
Store the wheel cover (Canada only)

and the damaged wheel in the trunk.
Only use genuine equipment

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could tip over.
Before storing the jack, it should be fully

collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
position) ( page 302).
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last

wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
Warning!
1-5
Wheel bolts
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,

following the diagonal sequence
illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
tight. Observe a tightening torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
321
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting wheel cover (Canada only)
Position small wheel cover opening

over tire valve and press wheel cover
against wheel rim.
Now press (do not hit) opposite side of

wheel cover against wheel rim until
seated.
!
The wheel cover does not fit the
Minispare wheel.
Make certain that the springs of the

wheel cover are firmly seated in the
outer rim of the steel wheel.
Wheel cover on vehicles with steel rims
(Canada only)
322
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side.
Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can

result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Removal of filter box:
Release the three clamps 1.
Remove filter box.
Installation of filter box:
Insert filter box properly.
Secure it with the three clamps 1.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not

allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning!
Do not place metal objects on the battery as

this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
323
Practical hints
Battery
Warning!
With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch
the gear selector lever will remain

locked in position P
Disconnecting the battery
Charging and reinstalling the battery
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Charge battery in accordance with the

instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Remove the filter box ( page 323).
Disconnect battery negative lead 1.
Remove cover 2 from positive

terminal.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow

the previously described steps in
reverse order.
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the battery
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal cover
324
Remove the screw-nuts securing the

battery.
Remove the battery bracket.
Take out the battery.
Warning!
Never charge a battery while still installed in

the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Practical hints
Battery
Reconnecting the battery
Connect the positive lead and fasten its

cover 2.
The following procedures must be

carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):
Connect negative lead 1.
Set the clock ( page 126).

See COMAND operators manual.
Resynchronize the ESP

( page 282).
Resynchronize side windows

( page 202).
Resynchronize sliding/pop-up
roof* ( page 205).
!
NEVER invert the terminal connections!
Reinstall the filter box ( page 323).
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.

Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
for recycling.
325
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause

damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
326
If the battery is discharged, the engine can

be started with jumper cables and the
battery of another vehicle. Observe the
following:
Jump starting should only be performed

when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery is

frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Only jump start from batteries with the

same voltage rating (12 V). Jump
starting with a more powerful battery
could damage the vehicles electrical
system, which will not be covered by
Only use jumper cables with sufficient

cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when an engine is
started or running.
!
Jump starting may only be performed
on the battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine
using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
Connect negative terminal 3 of the

charged battery with negative under
hood terminal 4 of the discharged
battery with the jumper cables. Clamp
cable to charged battery 3 first.
Start the engine of the disabled

vehicle.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.

Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
( page 258).
The battery is located in the engine

compartment on the right hand side. The
terminals for jump starting are located in
front of the battery.
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
1 Positive terminal of charged battery

2 Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3 Negative terminal of charged battery
4 Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
Apply parking brake.
Shift gear selector lever to position P

(manual transmission to Neutral).
Connect positive terminal 1 of the

charged battery with positive under
hood terminal 2 in front of the
discharged battery with the jumper
cables. Clamp cable to charged
battery 1 first.
You can now again turn on the electrical

consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
Remove the jumper cables first from

negative terminals 3 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 2.
You can now turn on the lights.
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start engine of the vehicle with the

charged battery and run at idle speed.
327
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the
vehicle be transported with all wheels off
the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is
preferable to other types of towing.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
( page 79) and deactivate the automatic central locking ( page 133).
328
When circumstances do not permit the

recommended towing methods, the
vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground or front wheels raised (except
vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing
so could damage the transfer case,
which is not covered by the
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
immediately be engaged and will apply
the rear wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever
must be in position N (manual transmission: gears disengaged) and the
SmartKey must be in starter switch
position 2.
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and
at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the drive train, however, we
recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
(vehicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for
any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
If circumstances require towing the vehicle

with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the power

supply or in the vehicles electrical
system
as that will be necessary to adequately

control the towed vehicle.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn
signal in the usual manner only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the
hazard warning flasher will operate
again.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on

the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.
329
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!

systems. In this case, it is important to keep
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

on the ground, please note the
following:
If the battery is disconnected or

discharged
With the automatic central locking

activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, the vehicle doors
lock if the left front wheel as well as the
right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
( page 79).
To prevent the vehicle doors from
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking ( page 133).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed
towing eye bolt. Never attach tow
cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle
chassis, frame or suspension parts.
330
the SmartKey will not turn in the

starter switch. See notes on the
battery ( page 323) or on jump
starting ( page 326).
the gear selector lever will remain

locked in position P. See notes on
manually unlocking transmission
gear selector lever ( page 308).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Removing cover
Press mark on cover in direction of

arrow.
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for

towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the

tool kit (located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor).
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper.
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and

tighten with lug wrench.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper.

Reinstalling cover
Fit cover and snap into place.
331
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
Opening
Only install fuses that have been tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage
rating.
Pull cover 1 open with a screw driver

or similar tool.
Remove cover rearward.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a

blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Closing
Attach cover 1 in the front.
Fold cover in until it engages.
Fuse chart
1 Cover
332
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in

the passenger compartment. The amperages of the fuses are also given there.
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine
compartment on the left hand side.
Removing/installing cover
Twist screws 1
90 counterclockwise.
Pull up cover 2.
Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover

by pulling towards front.
Install cover 2 in reverse order.
Opening fuse box
4 Fuse box cover

5 Clamps
1 Screw
2 Cover
3 Retainer
Release clamps 5.
Remove cover 4.
Closing fuse box
Ensure that the sealing rubber is

properly positioned.
Press cover 4 down and secure with

clamps 5.
333
Practical hints
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
trunk.
Opening
Pull away trim panel 1.
Remove cover 2.
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
in the spare wheel well.
1 Trim panel
2 Cover of auxiliary fuse box
3 Special fuse extractor
334
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
335
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The Technical data section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers

maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject
to stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
336
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicles
durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are

covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
337
Technical data
1 Certification label
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Information label, California version

Vacuum line routing for emission
control system
4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
6 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
338
Technical data
C 240/C 320 (all models)
C 32 AMG
1 Power steering pump

2 Idler pulley
3 Supercharger
4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)

4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
7 Idler pulley
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Supercharger
7 Crankshaft
8 Coolant pump
339
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
C 230 Kompressor Sport (203.040)1
C 240 (203.061)1
C 240 4MATIC (203.081)1
Engine
271
112
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
Bore
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke
3.35 in (85.00 mm)
2.68 in (68.20 mm)
Total piston displacement
109.6 cu in (1796 cm )
158.5 cu in (2597 cm3)
Compression ratio
8.5:1
10.5:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
189 hp/5800 rpm

(141 kW/5800 rpm)
168 hp/5500 rpm

(125 kW/5500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
192 lb-ft/3500 - 4000 rpm

(260 Nm/3500 - 4000 rpm)
177 lb-ft/4500 rpm

(240 Nm/4500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6200 rpm
Firing order
1-3-4-2
1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt
2420 mm
2380 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
340
Technical data
Engine
Model
C 320 (203.064)1
C 320 4MATIC (203.084)1
C 320 Sport (203.064)1
C 32 AMG (203.065)1
Engine
112
112
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
Bore
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
195.2 cu in (3199 cm )
195.2 cu in (3199 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
215 hp/5700 rpm

(160 kW/5700 rpm)
349 hp/6100 rpm

(260 kW/6100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
229 lb-ft/3000 - 4600 rpm

(310 Nm/3000 - 4600 rpm)
332 lb-ft/4400 rpm

(450 Nm/4400 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6200 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt
2380 mm
2908 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
341
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Rims and Tires
Only use tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption
342
Moreover, tires and rims not approved

by Mercedes-Benz may, under load,
exhibit dimensional variations and
different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the
vehicle may be the result.
Further information on tires and rims is

available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel
filler flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturers maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Same size tires
Model
C 240
C 240 4MATIC
C 320
C 320 4MATIC
C 230 Kompressor Sport C 230 Kompressor Sport C 32 AMG

C 320 Sport
C 320 Sport
Rims
(light alloy)
7 J x 16 H2
71/2 J x 17
71/2 J x 17
Rims
7 J x 16 H2
(steel - Canada only)
Wheel offset
1.46 in (37 mm)
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.46 in (37 mm)
All-season tires
(radial-ply tires)
205/55 R16 91H
Summer tires
(radial-ply tires)
225/45 R17 91W1
Winter tires
(radial-ply tires)
205/55 R16 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S
225/45 R17 91H M+S
205/50 R17 89H M+S2

or
225/45 R17 91H M+S1, 2
1
2
Must not be used with snow chains.

Only on rim 71/2 J x 17 H2
343
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
Model

C 320 Sport
C 32 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
71/2 J x 17 H2
71/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.46 in (37 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
225/45 R17 91W

or
225/45 R17 91Y
225/45 R17 91Y1

or
225/45 ZR17 91Y1
Rims (light alloy)
81/2 J x 17 H2
81/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.34 in (34 mm)
Front axle:
Rear axle:
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
344
1.34 in (34 mm)

1
245/40 R17 91W

or
245/40 R17 91Y1
245/40 R17 91Y1

or
245/40 ZR17 91Y1
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Minispare wheel
Model
C 240
C 240 4MATIC
C 320
C 320 4MATIC

C 320 Sport
C 32 AMG
Rim (steel)
3.5 B x 16 H2
3.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset
0.67 in (17 mm)
Tire
1
T 125/90 R16 98M
0.67 in (17 mm)

1
T 125/80 R17 99M1
345
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
C 32 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/120 A
14 V/120 A
14 V/120 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.1 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F 6 MPP 332
Bosch F 8 DPP 332

NGK PFR 5 R-11
NGK IFR 6 D 10
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque
18 22 lb-ft (25 30 Nm)
15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm)
15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm)
346
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model
C 240
C 320
C 320 Sport
Overall vehicle length
178.3 in (4528 mm)
178.3 in (4528 mm)
178.3 in (4528 mm)
Overall vehicle width
68.0 in (1728 mm)
68.0 in (1728 mm)
68.0 in (1728 mm)
Overall vehicle height
56.4 in (1433 mm)
56.3 in (1429 mm)
55.6 in (1411 mm)
Wheelbase
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.8 in (1493 mm)
Track, rear
57.6 in (1464 mm)
57.6 in (1464 mm)
57.6 in (1464 mm)
Model
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 4MATIC
C 32 AMG
Overall vehicle length
178.3 in (4528 mm)
178.3 in (4528 mm)
Overall vehicle width
68.0 in (1728 mm)
68.0 in (1728 mm)
Overall vehicle height
56.0 in (1422 mm)
56.1 in (1426 mm)
Wheelbase
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.8 in (1493 mm)
Track, rear
57.6 in (1464 mm)
58.0 in (1474 mm)
347
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
348
Technical data
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use

brands tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved

Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model
Capacity

C 240
C 320
C 320 Sport
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 4MATIC
C 32 AMG
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Manual transmission
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
MB Manual Transmission Oil
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Engine with oil filter
Rear axle

C 240 (all models)
C 320 (all models)
C 32 AMG
349
Technical data
Model
Capacity
Front axle
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 4MATIC
0.5 US qt (0.46 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Transfer case
C 240 4MATIC
C 320 4MATIC
approx. 0.62 US qt (0.59 l) MB Transfer case fluid
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
0.5 US qt (0.5 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent
16.4 US gal (62.0 l)

2.1 US gal (8.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:

Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of

C 240 (all models)
C 320 (all models)
C 32 AMG
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (identified by a label

reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on
fuel filler flap):
Alternative fuel: Ethanol fuel (E85)
350
Technical data
Model
Capacity
Air conditioning system
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil

(never R-12)
Windshield washer
3.2 US qt (3.0 l)
Windshield washer and

6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 358).
351
Technical data
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, only
use engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
engine oils is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
!
Always check the oil filler cap
( page 255) for important information
pertaining to the engine oil needing to
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only
use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on
the oil filler cap.
352
Using engine oils of other specification

may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air
conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based

lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of
bubbles in the system, thus reducing the
systems efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be
replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
provide you with additional information.
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline
Fuel requirements
To maintain the engines durability and

performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a

label reading Premium gasoline or
E85 only! are designed to operate on
premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol
fuel (E85) or any mixture of these two.
See notes on Flexible Fuel Vehicles

( page 354).
Have the fuel tank only partially

filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.
Do not exceed an engine speed of

3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two
persons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum

accelerator pedal position if the
vehicle is fully loaded or operating
in mountainous terrain.
Only use premium unleaded meeting

ASTM standard D 439:
The octane number (posted at the

pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2. This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates

such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can
be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
353
Technical data
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused
by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends
only the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of
carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives

with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to engine
operation.
354
Damage or malfunctions resulting from

poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a
label reading Premium gasoline or E85
only! on fuel filler flap.
These vehicles are designed to operate on
premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol
fuel (E85), or on any mixture of these two.
Ethanol fuel (E85) is a mixture of
approximately 85% Ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
Warning!
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly

flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
or if you come into contact with it or inhale
fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol
fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extinguish all open flames before fueling. Never
smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.
Switching fuels
For best performance and driveability it is
recommended to use either one or the
other fuel. A refueling pattern that
alternates between the two different fuels
should be avoided if possible.
Technical data
When switching fuels, make sure:
Cold weather performance
Cruising range
Fuel level is below half full.
Fuel level is above reserve (fuel reserve

warning lamp is not lit).
Amount of added fuel is more than

5 gallons (20 liters).
Ignition is off during refill.
Immediately after refueling engine is

started and operated for at least five
minutes.
It is possible that starting times will significantly increase at temperatures

below 32F (0C). At low temperatures
the use of a block heater (Canada only) is
recommended (see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information). Rough idling may also be
experienced at such temperatures before
the engine is fully warmed up.
E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon

than gasoline. To ensure that engine performance with Ethanol fuel is similar to
that when using gasoline, the engine must
burn more Ethanol fuel. As a result, it is to
be expected that the fuel consumption will
increase when using E85 compared to
gasoline operation.
These precautions and recommendations

are supposed to prevent any difficulties
when starting and operating the engine
which otherwise may be experienced
before the engine has fully adapted to the
different fuel.
If in spite of these recommendations the
engine does not perform properly, adding
more gasoline [at least 3 gallons
(12 liters)] to the fuel may improve the
engine behavior.
!
E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when
ambient temperatures fall below 14F
(-10C).
Hot weather performance
At ambient temperatures above 95F
(35C) start times may increase and be
accompanied by a rough idle following the
start.
i
Use of E85 may reduce your driving
range.
Maintenance
Please inform your Mercedes-Benz Center
if you use or have used E85 fuel when your
vehicle is delivered for maintenance or
repairs.
355
Technical data
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
provides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the

boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory

with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22F (-30C) and
corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective
to -22F (-30C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approx. 266F (130C).
356
The coolant solution must be used

year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over
protection. Refer to Service Booklet for
replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Service Booklet is only applicable
if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant
concentration or bring it back up to the
proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approx. -22F
(-30C)].
If you use a solution that is more than 55%

anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approx. -49F (-45C)], the
engine temperature will increase due to
the lower heat transfer capability of the
solution. Therefore, do not use more than
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality,
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum
components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts.
Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly

shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or

once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection

35F (37C)
49F (45C)
3.0 US qt (2.8 l)
3.3 US qt (3.1 l)
3.4 US qt (3.2 l)
3.8 US qt (3.6 l)
C 32 AMG
3.4 US qt (3.2 l)
3.8 US qt (3.6 l)
357
Technical data
cleaning* system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx.:
3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without

6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate S and water
(or concentrate and commercially
available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
and water:
Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze

on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
1 part S to 100 parts water
[40 ml S to 1 gallon (4.0 liters) water]

For temperatures below freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1 part S to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml S to 1 gallon (4.0 liters) solvent]
358
Technical data
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars
under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety
Act of 1966.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Tread wear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread Wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half (11/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tires ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
359
Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tires
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
360
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is
installed on the front passenger seat.
The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front airbag when
such a seat is properly installed
(PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
located in the center console comes
on). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats

Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the
passenger front airbag if a
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is
installed.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service
center, which can help you with any
questions about your vehicle and
provide assistance in the event of a
breakdown.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking
situations. The system is activated
when it senses an emergency based on
how fast the brake is applied.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control
vehicle functions such as door locking
or windshield wiping depending on
vehicle settings and/or ambient
conditions.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more
intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the
passenger compartment needed for
vehicle operation and monitoring.

Automotive Corp.
361
Technical terms
COMAND*
(Cockpit Management and Data
System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the
navigation system, as well as other
optional equipment (CD changer*,
telephone*, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to
adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for
automatically maintaining the vehicle
speed set by the driver.
362
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine
produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction
(viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can
tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and
directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the
system's threshold to tighten the
seat belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service
is due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector
lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special
receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Technical terms
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the drivers field of vision,
including the tachometer, speedometer, engine temperature display and
fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the
vehicle and should not be used for
normal acceleration needs.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or
unlocked. Pushing the lock button
down on an individual door from inside
will lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each SmartKey.
Menu
The control system displays are
arranged in menus. Each menu
contains a number of commands for
particular systems. In the Audio menu,
for example, you will find the
commands SELECT RADIO STATION or
OPERATE CD PLAYER. Using commands,
you can directly change the settings for
your vehicle.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a
gasoline's ability to resist undesired
detonation (knocking). The average of
both the MON (Motor Octane Number)
and ->RON (Research Octane Number)
is posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.
Steering wheel with buttons for
operating the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this
engine speed range, as it may result in
serious engine damage that is not
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
363
Technical terms
Power train
Collective term designating all
components used to generate and
transmit motive power to the drive
axles, including
engine
clutch/torque converter
transmission
transfer case
drive shaft
differential
axle shafts/axles
Program mode selector switch

Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S
and comfort operation C.
364
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics

Transmission of vehicle data and
current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for
subscribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the
vehicle interior for a short time after
the engine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective
functions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission gear
selector lever from being moved out of
position P without SmartKey turned
and brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning
device and airbags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant
protection.
Technical terms
Tele Aid* System

(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and
manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is
initially activated by completing a
subscriber agreement and placing an
acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational
provided that the vehicles battery is
charged, properly connected, not
damaged and cellular and GPS
coverage is available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms telecommunications and informatics.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Tire speed rating

Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is
approved.
Voice control system*

Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio
systems (radio, CD, etc.).
365
366
Index
A
ABS 23, 72, 361
ABS control 72
Malfunction indicator lamp 274
Messages in display 284
Accelerator position,
automatic transmission* 147
Accident
In case of 49
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling)
Automatic climate control* 170
Climate control 160
Climate control 158
Anti-theft alarm system* 78
Central locking (control system) 133
Charcoal filter 169
Climate control 155
Climate control system 159

Defrosting
Climate control 158
Easy-entry/exit feature* 134
ESP 76
Exterior headlamps 46
Exterior lamps 103
Exterior rear view mirror
parking position* 150
Hazard warning flasher 106
Headlamps 46
High beams 106
Ignition 31
Immobilizer 52
Rapid seat heating* 98
Rear fog lamp 104, 105
Rear window defroster 153
Residual heat 171
Seat heating* 98
Tow-away alarm* 80
Windshield wipers 48
Adding
Coolant 257
Engine oil 255
Additional turn signals 310
Adjustable air vents,
rear passenger compartment
Climate control 161
Adjusting 32
Air distribution
Climate control 157
Air volume
Climate control 157
Backrest contour 97
Backrest side bolsters 97
Backrest tilt
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Exterior rear view mirrors 38
367
Index
Head restraint height, front seats

Manual seat 34
Power seat* 35
Head restraint height, rear seats 94
Head restraint tilt, front seats
Manual seat 34
Power seat* 36
Head restraint tilt, rear seats 96
Head restraints, rear seats
Folding back 95
Folding back with release
switch 95
Placing upright 95
Instrument cluster illumination 109
Interior rear view mirror 38
Manual seat 33
Mirrors 38
Multicontour seat* 97
Power seat* 35
Rear seat head restraints 94
368
Seat belt height 42

Seat cushion depth 97
Seat cushion tilt
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Seat height
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Seats 32
Steering column height,
electrical* 38
Steering column height,
manual 37
Steering column length,
electrical* 38
Steering column length,
manual 37
Steering wheel 36

Turning off
Climate control 160
Turning on
Climate control 160
Air conditioning refrigerant 352
Air distribution
Adjusting
Climate control 157
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Activating
Climate control 158
Deactivating
Climate control 159
Index
Air vents, rear passenger compartment

Adjustable
Climate control 161
Air volume
Adjusting
Climate control 157
Airbags 55
BabySmartTM deactivation
system 66, 361
Children 56
Front 59
Passenger 59
Safety guidelines 58
Side impact 60
Window curtain 60
Alarm
Audible 71, 78
Canceling 79
Visual 78
Alarm system
Anti-theft* 78
Tow-away* 79
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 319, 361
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 357
Antiglare
Automatic* 149
Manual 149
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft alarm system*
Arming 78
Canceling alarm 79
Disarming 79
Anti-theft systems 78
Immobilizer 78
Tow-away alarm* 79
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 218
Storage spaces 219
Ashtrays 220
ATF 256
AUDIO menu 118
Selecting radio station 119
Selecting satellite radio* station 119
Audio system 173
Audio and telephone, operation 173
Button and soft key operation 176
Cassette operation 186
CD* operation 189
Operating and display elements 174
Operating safety 173
Operation 176
Radio operation 179
Switching off 176
Switching on 176
Telephone* operation 193
Automatic antiglare* for rear view
mirror 149
Activating/deactivating
(control system) 133
369
Index

Activating 163
Adjusting air distribution 166
Adjusting air volume 166
Air recirculation mode 167
Deactivating 163
Defrosting 167
Residual heat utilization 171
Residual ventilation 171
Setting the temperature 165
Automatic headlamp mode 103
Automatic lighting control
Activating 107
Deactivating 107
Automatic locking when driving 90
Automatic transmission fluid see ATF
Automatic transmission* 142
Accelerator position 147
Comfort program mode 146
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 147
Fluid level 256
370
Gear ranges 144

Gear selector lever 44
Gear selector lever position 142, 145
Gear shifting malfunctions 147
Kickdown 147
Manual shifting 143
One-touch gearshifting 143
Program mode selector switch 146
Starting with 44
Transmission fluid 256
Auxiliary fuse box 334
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 66, 361
Compatible child seats 66, 361
Self-test 66
Backrest
Folding forward 213
Folding rearward 213
Backrest contour
Adjusting 97
Backrest side bolsters

Adjusting 97
Backrest tilt
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Backup lamps 311, 315
Bulbs 310
BAS 73, 361
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 307
Check lamp 83
Checking 84
Battery discharged
Jump starting 326
Battery, vehicle 258, 323
Charging 324
Disconnecting 324
Reconnecting 325
Reinstalling 324
Removing 324
Index
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 361

Bi-Xenon type*
Front lamp bulbs 313
Block heater 264
Blocking
Rear door window operation 70
Bolts
For Minispare wheel 304
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake fluid 352
Checking 251
Message in display 286
Brake lamp bulbs 311
Brake lamp, high mounted 311
Brake pads
Brakes 240
Warning lamp 275
Break-in period 238
Bulbs, replacing 310

Additional turn signals 310
Backup lamps 311
Brake lamps 311
Fog lamps 310
Front lamps 310
High beam 310
High beam flasher 310
High mounted brake lamp 311
License plate lamps 311, 315
Low beam 310
Parking lamps 310, 311, 313, 314
Rear fog lamp 311, 315
Rear lamps 311
Side marker lamps 310, 314
Standing lamps 310, 311, 313, 314
Tail lamp assemblies 311, 315
Turn signal lamps 310, 311
Button
Audio system 176
C
CAC 361
California
Important notice 11
Calling up
Range (distance to empty) 138
Service indicator 266
CAN system 361
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 349
Cargo area see Trunk
Cassette operation
Playing cassettes 186
Cassette player
Operating 121
Catalytic converter 247
CD changer* 189
CD player*
Operating 120
CD* operation 189
371
Index
Center console 25
Lower part 26
PASS. AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp 279
Upper part 25
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 127
Central locking
Automatic 90
From inside 91
Switch 91
Switching on/off
Unlocking from inside 91
Central locking switch 91
Certification label 338
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey) 307
CDs 189
Key setting 133
Charcoal filter 169
372
Charging
Vehicle battery 324
CHECK ENGINE
malfunction indicator lamp 276
Checking
Brake fluid 251
Coolant level 251, 257
Engine oil level 251, 254
Tire inflation pressure 251
Vehicle lighting 251
Child safety 63
Airbags 56
Infant and child restraint
systems 60, 63
LATCH-type child seat anchors 69
Child safety switch see
Blocking of rear door window operation
Child seat anchors
see LATCH-type child seat anchors
Cigarette lighter 221
Cleaning
Cloth upholstery 272
Cup holder 271
Hard plastic trim items 271
Headlamps 148
Headliner and shelf below
rear window 271
Instrument cluster 270
Leather upholstery 271
Light alloy wheels 270
MB Tex upholstery 272
Plastic and rubber parts 272
Seat belts 271
Steering wheel 271
Upholstery 271
Windows 270
Windshield 48
Wiper blades 270
Wood trims 272
Index
Climate control 154

Adjusting air distribution
and volume 157
Defogging windshield 157
Defrosting 158
Setting the temperature 156
Clock 23, 126
Closing
Glove box 216
Hood 253
Sliding/pop-up roof* 204
in an emergency 309
with SmartKey 204
Trunk lid 87
Windows 201
Windows with SmartKey 202
Cloth upholstery
Cleaning 272
Cockpit 20, 361
Cockpit Management and Data System

see COMAND*
COMAND* 362
COMAND*
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 105
High beam flasher 47
Turn signals 47
Comfort driving
Transmission program mode 146
Consumer information 359
transmitters 246
Control system 113, 362
AUDIO menu 118
Convenience submenu 133
Display digital speedometer 118
Functions 114, 117
Instrument cluster submenu 126
Lighting submenu 129
Malfunction memory menu 122

Menus 116, 117, 363
Multifunction display 113
Multifunction steering wheel 114
NAVI* menu 121
Selecting radio system 119
Selecting satellite radio* system 119
Settings menu 123
Standard display menu 118
Submenus 115, 117
TEL* menu 138
Trip computer menu 136
Vehicle submenu 132
Controller Area Network see CAN system
Convenience submenu 133
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature* 134
Setting key dependency 135
Setting parking position* for exterior
rear view mirror 136
373
Index
Coolant 257, 356

Adding 257
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 356
Capacities 350
Checking level 257
Temperature 248
Temperature display 110
Coolant level
Checking 257
Cruise control 206, 362
Canceling 207
Driving downhill 207
Driving uphill 207
Fine adjustment 208
Setting current speed 207
Setting speeds 208
Cruise control lever 206
Cruising range, fuel 355
374
Cup holder
Cleaning 271
In front of seat armrest 217
In rear seat armrest 218
Customer Assistance Center see CAC
D
Daytime running lamp mode 104
Setting 129
Deactivating
Climate control 160
Climate control 159
Alarm 79
Central locking (control system) 133
Climate control 155
Climate control system 159
Cruise control 207

Defrosting
Climate control 158
Engine with the SmartKey 52
ESP 75
Exterior lamps 103
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 131
Front fog lamps 131
Headlamps 51
Seat heating* 98
Tow-away alarm* 80
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging
Windshield
Climate control 157
Index
Defrosting
Climate control 158
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 131
Interior lighting 132
Dialing
A number (telephone*) 140
Difficulties
While driving
see Problems while driving
With starting 44
Digital speedometer 118
Direction of rotation (tires) 261
Discharged battery
Jump starting 326
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 324
Display
Display elements
Audio system 174
Displays
Digital speedometer 118
Messages 280
Selecting 129
Showing malfunctions 122
Symbol messages 284
Text messages 281
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 138
Door control panel 28
Door entry lamps 108
Door handle 28
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 230
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 85
Opening from the outside 83
Downhill driving
Cruise control 207
Downshifting
Manual transmission 141
Drink holder see Cup holder
Drinking and driving 239
Driving
Driving abroad 246
General instructions 40, 239
Hydroplaning 242
In winter 244
Problems 49
Safety systems 72
Through standing water 245
Driving abroad 246
Driving instructions 239
Driving off 241
4MATIC 77
ABS 72
BAS 73
ESP 74
Driving systems 206
Cruise control 206
Driving safety systems 72
375
Index
E
Easy-entry/exit feature* 92
Activating 134
Interrupting movement 92, 134
Electrical fuses 332
Electrical system
Technical data 346
Electronic Stability Program see ESP
Emergency call system* 223
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 226
Telephone* 198
With Tele Aid* 224
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 147
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 309
Locking the vehicle 306
Opening sliding/pop-up roof* 309
Releasing trunk lid from inside 88
Remote door unlock 230
Unlocking the vehicle 305
376
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD

Emission control 247
Emission control label 338
Ending
A call (telephone*) 139
Engine
Compartment 252
Starting with
automatic transmission* 44
Starting with
manual transmission 43
Starting with the SmartKey
Technical data 340
Turning off with the SmartKey 52
Engine cleaning 269
Engine compartment 252
Fuse box in 333
Hood 252
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp 23, 276
Engine number 338, 362

Engine oil 253, 352
Adding 255
Additives 352
Checking level 251, 254
Consumption 253
Display messages 254, 291292
Filler neck
C 230 Kompressor Sport 256
C 240, C 320, and C 32 AMG 256
Messages in display 254, 291292
Viscosity 362
Engine oil level
Checking 251, 254
ESP 23, 74, 362
Four wheel electronic
traction system with ESP 77
Switching off 75
Switching on 76
Synchronizing 282
Warning lamp 277
Index
ETD 63, 362

Ethanol fuel
At the gas station 249
Requirements 354
Switching fuels 354
Exterior lamp switch 46, 102
Exterior lamps
Delayed shut-off 131
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 38
Parking position* for 136
F
Fahrenheit
Fastening the seat belts 40
Filler neck
C 230 Kompressor Sport 256
C 240, C 320, and C 32 AMG 256
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 208
First aid kit 300
Flat tire 317
Lowering the vehicle 321
Minispare wheel 302
Mounting the Minispare wheel 317
Preparing the vehicle 317
Flexible fuel vehicles 354
At the gas station 249
Switching fuels 354
Flexible Service System see FSS
Fog lamp, rear
Replacing bulb 311
Switching on 105
Fog lamps, front
Replacing bulbs 310
Switching on 105
Four wheel electronic traction

system (4MATIC) with ESP 77
4MATIC 77
Front airbags 59
Front lamps
Bi-Xenon* type 313
Halogen-type 312
Replacing bulbs 310, 312
Switching on 102
Front seat head restraints
Installing
Manual seat 93
Power seat* 94
Manual seat 93
Power seat* 94
Removing
Manual seat 93
Power seat* 94
Front seats
Heating* 98
377
Index
FSS 265, 362

Fuel 250
Additives 354
Cruising range 355
E85 (Ethanol fuel) 355
Fuel reserve warning lamp 278
Gasoline additives 354
Premium unleaded
gasoline 250, 350, 353
Requirements 353, 354
Reserve warning 23
Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) 354
Technical data 350
Fuel additives 354
Fuel cap
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 137
Since last reset 137
378
Fuel filler flap 249

Locking 249
Opening in an emergency 308
Unlocking 249
Fuel requirements 353
For ethanol fuel 354
Fuel reserve tank
Fuel tank
Capacity 350
Filler flap 249
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 349
Functions (control system) 114, 117
Resetting 124
Fuse box
Auxiliary in trunk 334
In engine compartment 333
In passenger compartment 332
Fuse chart 332

Fuse extractor 334
Fuses 332
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 334
Fuse box in engine compartment 333
Fuse box in
passenger compartment 332
Fuse chart 332
Fuse extractor 334
Spare fuses 334
G
Garage door opener 27, 231
Gasoline see Fuel
Gear range 362
Limiting 144
Shifting into optimal 143
Gear range limit
Canceling 143
Index
Gear selector lever 23, 44

Cleaning 271
Lock 44
Position (Automatic
transmission*) 23, 142, 145
Gearshift lever 43
Global
Locking 83
Unlocking 83
Global Positioning System see GPS
Glove box 21, 216
Closing 216
Opening 216
Good visibility 148
GPS 362
GPS see COMAND*
H
Halogen-type
Front lamp bulbs 312
Hands-free microphone 27
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 271

Switching off 106
Switching on 106
Head restraints
Front seats
Manual seat 34, 93
Power seat* 35, 94
Rear seats 94
Headlamp cleaning system* 259
Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed
shut-off, exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic control 103
Bi-Xenon* 361
Bi-Xenon* type
Replacing bulbs 313
Cleaning 269
Cleaning system* 148, 259, 358
Halogen-type
Replacing bulbs 312
Refilling washer fluid 259
Switching off 51
Switching on 46
Washer fluid 358
Headliner and shelf below rear window

Cleaning 271
Heated seats* 98
Height adjustment
Front seat head restraints
Manual seat 34
Power seat* 35
Seat belts 42
Steering wheel
Adjustment, electrical* 37
Adjustment, manual 37
High beam flasher 47, 106
High beam headlamps
Switching on 106
High beam headlamps xenon type*
Replacing bulbs 313
High mounted brake lamp 311
379
Index
Hood 252
Closing 253
Message in display
Opening 252
Hydroplaning 242
293
I
Identification labels 338
Certification label 338
Vehicle Identification Number 338
Ignition 31
Switching on
Immobilizer 78
Activating 78
Deactivating 78
Indicator lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning
380
Infant and child restraint systems 63

Installing 68
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 227
Installing
Ski sack* 212
Towing eye bolt 331
Wiper blades 316
Instrument cluster 22, 109, 363
Cleaning 270
Coolant temperature display 110
Illumination 109
Lamps in 274278
Outside temperature indicator 111
Selecting language 128
Instrument lighting 109
Instruments and controls see Cockpit

Activating automatic control 107
Deactivating automatic control 107
Delayed shut-off 132
Manual operation 107
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Antiglare 149
Interior storage spaces 216
Armrest 219
Cup holder in front
of seat armrest 217
Cup holder in rear seat armrest 218
Glove box 216
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell 220
Storage compartment
in front of armrest 218
J
Jack 300
Jump starting
326
Index
K
Key dependency memory
Settings 135
Key positions in starter switch 31
Key, mechanical 305
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 83
Checking the batteries 84
Factory setting 83
Global locking 83
Global unlocking 83
Loss of 85
Positions in starter switch 31
Remote control 82
Restoring to factory setting 83
Selective setting 83
Starting the engine
Turning off the engine 52
Unlocking the trunk lid 84

Unlocking with 30
Kickdown 147, 363
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 128
Km/h or mph in speedometer 128
L
Labels, identification 338
Lamp bulbs, exterior 310
Lamps, exterior
Front 310
Light sensor 294
Rear 311
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 274
Battery (SmartKey) 83
Brakes 275
CHECK ENGINE 276
Engine diagnostics 276, 278
ESP 277
Fuel reserve 278

PASS. AIRBAG OFF 59, 279
Seat belts 278
SRS 55, 278
Turn signals 23
Language
Setting 128
Folding back 69
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 339
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 271
License plate lamps
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 270
Technical data 343
Light sensor 294
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
381
Index
Lighting 102
Automatic headlamp mode 103
Combination switch 105
Door entry lamps 108
Exterior lamp switch 102
Front fog lamps 105
High beams 106
Instrument cluster illumination 109
Instruments 109
Interior 107
Locator lighting 104
Low beam 102
Manual headlamp mode 103
Night security illumination 104
Parking lamps 102
Rear fog lamp 105
Settings (control system) 129
Trunk lamp 108
Limiting the gear range 144
Limp Home Mode 147
382
Loading 209
Instructions 214
Roof rack* 209
Ski sack* 209
Split rear bench seat* 212
Setting 130
Lock button 363
Locking 50, 82
Automatic while driving 90
Centrally from inside 91
Global, SmartKey 83
Separately the trunk 89
Vehicle in an emergency 306
Loss of keys 85
Loss of Service and
Warranty Information Booklet 337
Low beam headlamps
Lowering
Vehicle 321
Lubricants
Technical data 349
M
Main dimensions 347
Maintenance 12, 265
Vehicles with E85 fuel 355
Malfunction
Displaying 122
Malfunction memory 122
Calling up 122
Clearing 122
Manual headlamp mode 103
Manual operations
Interior lighting control 107
Locking the trunk 89
Locking the vehicle 306
Unlocking the drivers door 305
Unlocking the trunk 90, 306
Unlocking transmission
gear selector lever 308
Index
Manual seat
Adjusting 33
Adjusting backrest tilt 33
Adjusting head restraint height 34
Adjusting head restraint tilt 34
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33
Adjusting seat height 33
Front seat head restraints 93
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33
Gearshift lever 43
Shifting into reverse 141
Starting with 43
MAXCOOL Maximum cooling 167
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 272
Mechanical key 305
Memory function* 99, 363
Recalling positions from
memory 100
parking position 101
Storing key dependent settings 100
Menus 114
AUDIO 118
Control system 363
In control system 116, 117
Malfunction memory 122
NAVI* 121
Settings menu 123
Standard display 118
Submenus 115
TEL* 138
Trip computer 136
Microphone
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 128
Minispare wheel 302
Bolts 304
Mounting 317
Removing 302
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Automatic antiglare* for
interior mirror 149
Automatic antiglare* for
rear view mirror 149
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Exterior rear view mirror
MON 250, 363
Motor Octane Number see MON
Mph or km/h in speedometer 128
Multifunction display 113, 363
Displaying gear range 144
Selecting language 128
Standard display 117
383
Index
Multifunction display messages

ABS 284
BAS 281
Battery, vehicle 285
Brake fluid 286
Brake pads 286
Coolant 287289
Cruise control 290
Display 290
Doors 290
Engine oil 291292
ESP 282283
Fuel cap 293
Fuel reserve tank 293
Hood 293
Key, SmartKey 293
Lamps, exterior 293296
Oil 291292
Parking brake 286
Restraint system 297
384
Seat belts 297

SRS 297
Steering column not
properly locked 298
Steering gear oil level 298
Tele Aid* 299
Telephone* 299
Trunk lid 299
Windshield washer fluid 299
Multifunction steering
wheel 24, 114, 363
Buttons 114
N
Navigation system*
Operating 121
See separate COMAND*
operating instructions
Setting 131
O
Occupant safety 54
Airbags 55
Children and airbags 56
Children in the vehicle 63
Fastening the seat belt 40
Seat belts 40, 58
Odometer, main 23
Oil level see Engine oil level
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 143
Canceling gear range limit 143
Downshifting 143
Upshifting 143
Opening
Ashtray, center console 220
Ashtray, rear seat 221
Cup holder, in front of
seat armrest 217
Index
Cup holder, in rear seat armrest 218

Doors from the inside 85
Fuel filler flap manually 308
Glove box 216
Hood 252
Side windows 200
Sliding/pop-up roof* 203, 309
in an emergency 309
with SmartKey 204
Trunk 84
Trunk from the inside 87
Windows 200
Windows with SmartKey 202
Operating
Audio system 173
Cassette player 121
CD player* 120
COMAND*
see separate operating instructions
Navigation system* 121

Radio 119
Radio transmitters 246
Satellite radio* 119
Telephone* 138, 173, 193
Vehicle outside
the USA and Canada 13
Operating safety
Audio system 173
Operators Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 269
Outer seats
Rear seat head restraints 94, 96
Outside temperature indicator 111
Overdue service 265
Overhead control panel 27
Overspeed range 363
P
Paintwork 268
Panic alarm* 71
Panic button on SmartKey
71
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 220
Parking 50, 241
Parking brake 45, 50
Engaging 50
Releasing 45
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 310, 311, 313, 314
Switching on 102
Parking position*
Exterior rear view
mirrors 101, 136, 150
Parts see Spare parts service
PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 279
Passenger compartment 246
Fuse box in 332
Parcel net in front
passenger footwell 220
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
385
Index
Pedals 239
Performance
In cold weather 355
In hot weather 355
Phone book*
Loading 140
Quick search 140
Phone number*
Dialing 140
Redialing 140
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 272
Playing
CDs 191
Poly-V-belt drive 363
Layout 339
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 100
Storing into memory 100
Power assistance 239
386
Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 35
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35
Adjusting seat height 35
Memory function* 99
Removing/installing front
head restraints 94
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Power train 364
Power washer 268
Power windows 200
Blocking of
rear door window operation 70
Side windows 200
Synchronizing 202
Practical hints
First aid kit 300
Fuses 332
Lamp in center console 279
Lamps in instrument cluster 274

Messages in the display 280
Minispare wheel 302
Minispare wheel bolts 304
Symbol messages 284
Text messages 281
Towing the vehicle 328
Vehicle jack 301
Vehicle tool kit 300
Premium unleaded gasoline 353
Problems
While driving 49
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Program mode selector switch 364
Q
Quick search
Phone book*
140
Index
R
Radio
Selecting stations 119
Station search 119
Station selection setting 132
Radio operation 179
Radio see Radio operation
Radio transmitters,
control and operation 246
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 138
Rapid seat heating*
Switching off 98
Switching on 98
Reading lamp 27
Rear bench seat
Foldable* 212
Rear door window
Blocking operation 70
Rear fog lamp 311
Bulb 311
Switching on 105
Rear lamp bulbs

Replacing 315
Rear lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear outer seats
Rear passenger compartment,
Climate control 161
Adjusting 94
Adjusting tilt 96
Folding back 95
Folding back with
switch in center console 95
Installing 97
Outer seats 96
Placing upright 95
Removing 96
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors

Rear window sunshade* 152
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 325
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 352
Refueling 249
Regular checks 251
Reinstalling vehicle battery 324
Remote control
SmartKey 82
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 230
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 364
Removing
Minispare wheel 302
Ski sack* 212
Vehicle battery 324
Wheel 319
Wiper blades 316
387
Index
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 315
Brake lamp bulbs 315
Bulbs 310
Front lamp bulbs 310, 312
Front turn signal bulbs 312, 314
Fuses 334
High beam bulbs 312
High beam bulbs
(xenon-type* headlamps) 313
License plate lamp bulbs 315
Low beam bulbs 312
Parking lamp bulbs 313, 314
Rear fog lamp bulb 315
Rear lamp bulbs 311, 315
Rear turn signal bulbs 315
Side marker lamp bulbs 314
Standing lamp bulbs 313, 314
Wiper blades 316
Reporting
Safety defects 18
388
Research Octane Number see RON

Reset button in the
instrument cluster 23, 123, 124
Resetting
All functions (control system) 123
All functions of a submenu 124
Fuel consumption 137
Service indicator (FSS) 266
Trip odometer 111
Residual heat utilization 171
Residual ventilation 171
REST 171, 364
Restraint system
Restraint system see
Infant and child restraint systems
Reverse (manual transmission)
Shifting into 141
Rims 342
Roadside Assistance 12
RON 250, 364
Roof rack* 209
Rotating wheels 262

Rubber parts
Cleaning 272
S
Safety
Occupant 54
Safety belts see Seat belts
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 72
Searching
Radio station 119
Seat belt force limiter 63
Seat belt height adjustment 42
Seat belts 60
Cleaning 271
Fastening 40
Height adjustment 42
Proper use of 42, 62
Warning lamp 278
Index
Seat cushion depth

Adjusting 97
Seat heating*
Switching off 98
Switching on 98
Seats 92
Adjusting 32
Easy entry/exit feature* 92
Heating* 98
Manual seat 33
Power seat* 35
Selecting
Display 129
Selector lever see gear selector lever
Self-test
BabySmartTM
airbag deactivation system 66
Tele Aid* 224
Service
Calling up the service indicator 266
Major service (Service B) 265
Minor service (Service A) 265
Overdue 265
Spare parts 336
Types 265
When due 265
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 337
Service and warranty information 10
Calling up 266
Clearing 265, 266
Service life (tires) 261
Service see Maintenance
Service System see FSS
Setting
Convenience functions 125, 133
Cruise control 207
Higher speed in cruise control 208
Hours (clock) 126
Individual vehicle settings 123
Instrument lighting 109
Key dependent memory 135
Lamps and lighting
Language, multifunction display 128
Lower speed in cruise control 208
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 128
Minutes (clock) 126
Parking position* for exterior
rear view mirrors 136
Speed in cruise control 208
389
Index
Speedometer display mode 128

Station selection mode 132
Temperature (Interior)
Climate control 156
Temperature indicator 127
Time display mode (Clock) 127
Units
Speedometer 128
Temperature 127
Setting current speed 207
Settings
Convenience functions 133
Factory, SmartKey 83
Individual, SmartKey 135
Lighting (control system) 129
Menus and submenus 115
Resetting all (control system) 123
Resetting in the submenu 124
Selective, SmartKey 83
390
Settings menu
Functions in 123
Individual vehicle settings 123
Submenus 124
Shift lock 364
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 145
Gearshift lever 43
Into optimal gear range
(Automatic transmission*) 143
Into reverse
(Manual transmission) 141
Side impact airbags 60
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 310, 311, 314
Side markers
Cleaning 269
Side windows
Automatic opening 201
Cleaning 270
Closing 200, 201, 202
Closing fully 201
Closing with SmartKey 202
Opening 200, 201, 202
Opening fully 201
Opening with SmartKey 202
Stopping 201
Synchronizing power windows 202
Signal strength (telephone*) 139
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Single wipe 48
Ski sack* 209
Installing 212
Removing 212
Unfolding and loading 209
Unloading and folding 211
Index

Closing 203, 309
Closing with SmartKey 204
Opening 203, 309
Opening with SmartKey 204
Stopping 204
Synchronizing 205
SmartKey 82
Changing batteries 307
Locking and unlocking 82
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof* with 204
Opening and closing
windows with 202
Unlocking with 30
Snow chains 264
Soft keys
Audio system 176
Spare fuses 334
Spare parts service 336
Speed
Setting current 207
Speed settings
Cruise control 208
Speedometer 23
Settings units 128
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 128
SRS 62, 364
Indicator lamp 278
Standing lamps 102
Replacing bulbs 310, 311, 313, 314
Standing water
Starter switch 21, 31
Positions 31
Starting difficulties 44
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 43
Station (radio)
Search 119
Station selection
Setting 132
Steel rims
Technical data 343
Steering column
Height adjustment, electrical* 38
Height adjustment, manual 37
Length adjustment, electrical* 38
Length adjustment, manual 37
Steering gear oil
Steering wheel
Adjusting 36
Buttons 24
Cleaning 271
Electrical adjustment* 37
Manual adjustment 37
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 230
391
Index
Stopping
Windows 201
Storage compartments
Armrest 218
Glove box 216
Ventilated compartment 160
Storage spaces
Cup holder in front
of seat armrest 217
Cup holder in rear seat armrest 218
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 100
Submenus
Convenience 133
For settings 115
In control system 117
Lighting 129
Resetting functions in
Control system 124
Selecting 124
Settings menu 124
Vehicle 132
392
Sun visors 151

Sunshade* 152
Supplemental Restraint System see SRS
Switching
Fuel (Flexible fuel vehicle) 354
Switching off
Audio system 176
Delayed (exterior lamps) 131
Engine 52
ESP 75
Headlamps 51
Seat heating* 98
Switching on
Audio system 176
ESP 76
Front fog lamps 105

Headlamps 46
High beams 106
Rear fog lamp 105
Seat heating* 98
Symbols 15
Synchronizing
ESP 282
Power windows 202
T
Tachometer 23, 111
Displaying gear range 144
Overspeed range 111
Tail lamps
Cleaning 269
Tar stains 268
Index
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 352
Brake fluid 352
Coolant 350
Coolants 356
Electrical system 346
Engine oil additives 352
Engine oils 352
Flexible fuel vehicles 354
Fuel requirements 353
Fuels 350
Lubricants 349
Main dimensions 347
Premium unleaded gasoline 353
Rims and tires 342
Weights 348
Windshield washer 351
cleaning* system 351, 358
Tele Aid* 223

Emergency calls 224
Information 227
Initiating an emergency call
manually 226
Remote door unlock 230
Roadside assistance 226
SOS button 226
Stolen vehicle tracking services 230
System self-check 224
Tele Aid System 223, 365
Upgrade signals 229
Telematics* 365
Telephone* 24, 222
Answering a call 139
Dialing a number from
the phone book 140
Emergency call 198
Ending a call 139
Loading phone book 140

Operation 138, 193
Redialing 140
Signal strength 139
Temperature
Display mode 127
Grades of tires 360
Setting interior temperature
Climate control 156
Setting units in display 127
Tires 262
Tightening torque
(Wheel bolts) 321, 365
Tilt
Head restraint
Manual seat 34
Power seat* 36
Time
Setting hours 126
Setting minutes 126
165
393
Index
Time display
Setting 127
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 251, 261
Tire speed rating 243, 365
Tire traction 243
Tires 260, 342
Consumer information 359
Direction of rotation 261
Retreads 260
Rims and tires 342
Service life 261
Temperature 262
Temperature grades 360
Tread depth 263
Wear pattern 262
Winter 263
Tools 300
394
Tow-away alarm* 25, 79

Arming 80
Disarming 80
Disarming for transport 80
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 331
Towing the vehicle 328
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 230
Traction 147, 359, 365
Transmission gear selector lever
Unlocking manually 308
Transmission see
Automatic* or Manual transmission
Tread depth (tires) 263
Tread Wear 359
Trip computer 136
Trip odometer
Resetting 111
Trunk
Auxiliary fuse box 334
Closing the lid 87
Lamp 108
Opening 84
Opening from inside vehicle 87
Separately locking 89
Separately unlocking 90
Trunk lid emergency release 88
Trunk lid
Closing 87
Emergency release 88
Turn signal lamps
Turn signals 47
Additional in mirrors 310
Cleaning lenses 269
Front bulbs 310, 312, 314
Indicator lamps 23
Rear bulbs 311, 315
Turning off
Engine 52
Index
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 128
Unlocking 30, 82
Centrally from inside 91
Drivers door in an emergency 305
Global 83
In an emergency 305
Selective settings 83
Separately the trunk 90
Transmission gear selector
lever manually 308
Trunk in an emergency 306
Vehicle in an emergency 230
With the SmartKey 30
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 229
Uphill driving
Cruise control 207
Upholstery
Cleaning 271
Upshifting 143
Useful features 216
Ashtrays 220
Cigarette lighter 221
Tele Aid* 223
Telephone* 222
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 123, 125
Locking 25
Locking in an emergency 306
Lowering 321
Performance in cold weather 355
Performance in hot weather 355
Service battery 323
Towing 328
Unlocking 25
Unlocking in an emergency 305
With flexible fuel 354
Vehicle battery 323

Vehicle care 267
Cloth upholstery 272
Cup holder 271
Engine cleaning 269
Hard plastic trim items 271
Headlamps 269
Leather upholstery 271
Light alloy wheels 270
MB Tex upholstery 272
Ornamental moldings 269
Paintwork 268
Plastic and rubber parts 272
Power washer 268
Seat belts 271
Side markers 269
Steering wheel 271
Tail lamps 269
Tar stains 268
Turn signals 269
395
Index
Upholstery 271
Vehicle washing 269
Window cleaning 270
Wiper blades 270
Wood trims 272
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN
Vehicle jack 301
Vehicle lighting
Checking 251
Alignment bolt 300
Removing 300
Spare fuses 300
Special fuse puller 300
Towing eye bolt 300
Vehicle jack 300
Wheel bolts 300
Wheel wrench 300
Vehicle washing 269
396
Ventilated storage compartment

Ventilation
Storage compartment 160
VIN 338, 365
Voice control system* 365
160
W
Warning lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 60
Parking brake 45
Warranty coverage 337
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 267
Wear pattern (tires) 262
Weights 348
Wheel change
Tightening torque 321
Wheels
Rotating 262
Tires and wheels 260
Window curtain airbags 60
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging
Climate control 157
Refilling washer fluid 259
Replacing wiper blades 316
Washer fluid 259, 358
Washer system 358
Windshield washer fluid 358
Mixing ratio 358
Refilling 259
Wiping with 48
Windshield washer system 358
166
Index
Windshield wipers 47, 148

Fast wiper speed 48
Replacing wiper blades 316
Single wipe 48
Switching on 48
Wiping with
windshield washer fluid 48
Winter driving 263
Block heater 264
Snow chains 264
Tires 263
Winter driving instructions 244
Winter tires 263
Wiper blades
Cleaning 270
Installing 316
Removing 316
Replacing 316
Wiping
Interval 48
With windshield washer fluid
Wood trims
Cleaning 272
48
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon* 361
397
398
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operators Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2283-31
Press time 08/14/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany

w203 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

w203 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

w203 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C 230 Kompressor Sport

Our company and staff congratulate you

Please read this manual carefully, then

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company

Please follow the recommendations

Please pay attention to the warnings

We extend our best wishes for many miles

Getting started ...................................

Safety and Security ...........................

Controls in detail ............................... 81

Manual transmission .........................

Ventilated storage compartment .. 160

Power windows .................................. 200

At the gas station ..............................

Winter driving ....................................

Practical hints ................................

Replacing bulbs .................................. 310

Jump starting...................................... 326

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........

Technical terms............................... 361

We are unable to make an assessment for

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as

We continuously strive to improve our

Service and warranty information

New Car Limited Warranty

Optional equipment is also described in

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

State Warranty Enforcement Laws

If there are any equipment details that are

The Service and Warranty Information

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason

Change of address or ownership

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz

If you change your address, be sure to

For additional information refer to the

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all

Always have the Service Booklet with you

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to

service facilities or replacement parts

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Here you will find detailed information

Safety and Security

Here you will find all the information you

this Operators Manual

the Service Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be

Optional equipment is identified

This symbol points to instructions for

A number of these symbols appearing

This continuation symbol marks

In the glossary of technical

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in

This symbol tells you where to

Work improperly carried out on electronic